JP6721064B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

The game machine of pachinko machines and the like, and lottery whether or not those Tari to become based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, about whether or not to shift to the probability change state separately lottery during this have enough by, with the expectation for migrating to stochastic variation state to perform the game in those have enough, there is what is to improve player's interest in the game of the player.

Some gaming machine described above, for example, a game ball to the specific area YU skill sphere is possible ball entrance is when ball entrance, there is made a stochastic fluctuation state after completion of per.

JP, 2003-180999, A

However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine as possible it is possible to improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is based on the determination means for performing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player, a display means for displaying a performance mode, a performance control means for displaying a predetermined performance mode on the display means, and the privilege game executing means as a control after the execution of the privilege game is finished, the first control, a second control which is advantageous to the player than the first control, a control specifying means for specifying a plurality of first control including at least , in the gaming machine having a first condition in which the discrimination result of said discriminating means a first state in which the first control can be identified by the control identification means when a said specific discrimination result, predetermined a first state setting means for setting, based on the establishment, prior SL than the first state, plurality of the second control by the control identification means when the discrimination result of said discriminating means becomes the specific determination result Second state setting means for setting a second state in which it is easy to be continuously specified over the privilege game for a number of times, notification means for making a specific notification according to the determination result of the determination means, and at least the first In the state, when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, the first notification and the specific notification are terminated as the specific notification performed by the notification means. A second notification indicating that the second control is easily specified by the control specifying means in the privilege game to be executed later; and a notification determining means configured to be able to determine at least the at least the second notification . As an effect mode in the execution period of the privilege game executed in the one state, the first effect when the next privilege game after the privilege game is finished is the first situation that is easily executed in the first state allows determining the aspect, if the next of the benefits game than the first situation is the second situation is easy to be performed in the second state, the second representation embodiment different from the first representation embodiment The determination is made easier than in the first situation .

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, and is configured to be playable by using a predetermined gaming medium.

Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a benefit that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. The privilege game execution means for executing the game, the display means for displaying the effect mode, the effect control means for displaying a predetermined effect mode on the display means, and the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means are completed. as control after a first control and a second control which is advantageous to the player than the first control, a control specifying means for specifying a plurality of first control including at least, in the gaming machine having a A first state in which the control specifying unit can specify the first control when the determination result of the determining unit is the specific determination result is set based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. a first state setting means, before SL than the first state, the determination result is the second control by the control specifying means when a said specific discrimination result of said discriminating means is over the award game several times Second state setting means for setting a second state that facilitates continuous identification, notification means for performing a specific notification according to the determination result of the determination means, and determination of the determination means in at least the first state When the result is the specific determination result, as the specific notification performed by the notification means, a first notification and the privilege executed after the specific notification is completed rather than the first notification A second notification indicating that the second control is easily specified by the control specifying means in a game; and an information determining means configured to be able to determine at least the second information, and the information executed in at least the first state As the effect mode in the execution period of the privilege game , the first effect mode can be determined when the next privilege game after the privilege game is finished is the first situation that is easily executed in the first state, and In the second situation in which the next bonus game is more likely to be executed in the second state than in the first situation, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode than in the first condition It is configured to facilitate the decision. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a figure which shows the outline of a lottery apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the flow path of a lottery apparatus. It is sectional drawing in the modification of the flow path of a lottery apparatus. It is a continuation of the sectional view in the modification of the channel of a lottery device. It is a figure which shows how to distribute the traveling direction of the game ball by the traveling direction distribution unit of the lottery device. It is a figure which shows the outline of the distribution rotary body of a lottery apparatus. It is a figure showing an outline of a ball entrance distribution part of a lottery device. It is a figure showing an outline in the case where a game ball passes a back route in the state where the distribution rotator of a lottery device was swung to the right. It is a figure showing an outline in the case where a game ball passes a near route in the state where the distribution rotator of a lottery device was shaken to the right It is a figure showing an outline in the case where a game ball passes a back route in a state where a distribution rotator of a lottery device was shaken to the left. It is a figure showing an outline in the case where a game ball passes a near route in the state where the distribution rotator of a lottery device was shaken to the left. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of the distribution rotary body of a lottery apparatus, and each entrance. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the special jackpot type. , (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows structure position initialization processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery gate process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows rotator position detection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control procedure. It is the flowchart which showed the special production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. 6 is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the correspondence relationship of the 1st hit classification counter C2 in 2nd Embodiment, and the big hit classification in a special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st random number counter C1 in 2nd Embodiment, and the small hit in a special symbol. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control control equipment in 2nd execution form. 9 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting gate process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing 2 which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting control processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter C2 and the big hit classification in a special symbol in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control control equipment in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting control processing 2 which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 3rd execution form. 11 is a flowchart showing a flow path switching process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 3rd execution form. It is a timing chart comparing the timing of opening and closing the special winning opening and the timing of opening and closing the guide passage in the third embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the state of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment, and the production|presentation performed. (A) is a figure showing a variation pattern effect which is a big hit in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an effect executed during a big hit game. (A) is a figure showing a chance up pattern of variation pattern production in a 4th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing a chance up pattern of variation pattern production which is a big hit. (A) is the figure which showed the production performed during the jackpot game when re-entering a loop state in 4th Embodiment, and (b) is performed in the jackpot game which shifts to a low probability state after completion. It is the figure which shows the production which is done. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 4th execution form.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage” are used. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect, which are performed in association with the entry into the first entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “town stage”→“empty stage” is performed. ”→“Island stage”→“City town stage”→... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, in the third pattern display device 81, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right decorative portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling a ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to a back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first when the ball passes through the second entrance 67). A lottery of 2 symbols) will be held. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined. When the special symbol jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As the jackpot type of the special symbol, two types of "bonus A" and "bonus B" are provided, and as a value added after the jackpot ends after the special game state, the game according to these jackpot types. Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) elapses, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery. Is started. The special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball to win the special winning opening 65a, so that a large number of balls also enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

On the other hand, in the lottery for ordinary symbols performed for the passage of the ball in the second ball entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the regular symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. And is also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display ends in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is selected by lottery and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as special jackpot types. Both "big hit A" and "big hit B" are big hits with a maximum round number of eight.

The “big hit A” and the “big hit B” are flow path switching valves 331a, in the lottery for transitioning to the high probability state of the special symbol performed by the lottery device 300 (see FIG. 5) after the winning of the big hit is confirmed. Depending on 331b (see FIG. 9), there is a difference in whether the flow path through which the game ball passes is divided into the flow path on the front side of the rotating body 341 (front side route) or the flow path on the back side (back side route). That is, the "big hit A" is switched to the front side flow path (front route) (see FIG. 9B), and the "big hit B" is switched to the back side flow path (back route) (FIG. 9). (See (a)).

Here, the "front side" and the "back side" of the allocating rotary body 341 respectively refer to the front side or the back side for the player, and in the case of the front side flow path (front route), the pachinko machine. 10 is a flow path on the side closer to the player playing the game at 10 (the side farther from the base plate 60), and in the case of the flow path on the back side (back route), the side farther from the player (to the base plate 60) It is the flow path on the side closer to ().

Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16, whether the flow path is on the back side or the front side (that is, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b) and the flow path switching is performed. Depending on the state of the distribution rotary body 341 disposed immediately below the valves 331a and 331b, among the short time ball entrance 501 and the probability variation ball entrances 502 to 504 provided below the distribution rotary body 341. It is distributed to which entrance the game ball enters. In addition, when the game ball enters the time saving entrance 501, the special symbol moves to a low probability state after the jackpot is over, and a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, the fluctuation time is 100 times) It becomes a state. On the other hand, when the game ball enters any of the probability variation ball entrances 502 to 504, the state moves to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over.

When the flow path switching valve 331a is set to the front side flow path (front route), the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 are accurately changed by the distribution rotary member 341, and the winning opening 502, And the probability variation winning a prize mouth 504. Therefore, if it is set to the front side flow path (front route), it always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of being set to the inner side flow path (between route), the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is the time-reducing entrance 501 and the probability variation entrance due to the distribution rotary body 341. Since it is distributed to either 503, when it is distributed to the time saving entrance 501, it moves to a low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100) It becomes a time saving state. On the other hand, when the game sphere is distributed to the certainty variation ball entrance 503 by the distribution rotator 341, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol after that as a value added after the jackpot is up, that is, when the probability of the so-called special symbol is fluctuating (the probability of the special symbol is changing). In other words, it is a game state in which it is easy to shift to the special game state. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a time when the probability is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, in the "special symbol low probability state", the normal symbol time saving state (time saving time) means that the jackpot probability is the normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the winning probability of the ordinary symbol increases. A game state in which a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 is opened, or one hit It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessory is opened.

The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by a lighting state, or fluctuation among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the maximum number of times the ball is entered is held up to 4 times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times and is not more than three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and depending on the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). A special design (first design) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the first symbol display device 37 performs a variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state according to the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main design is formed by adding numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear design consisting of a wooden box, of which the main design with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached patterns simulating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 20) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. In the case of “big hit A” in which the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b of the lottery device 300 are switched to the front route, and in the case of “big hit B” in which the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b of the lottery device 300 are switched to the inner route, The variable display in which the main symbols to which any number from "0" to "9" is added is displayed. That is, the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that it cannot be distinguished whether it is the "big hit A" or the "big hit B". As described above, the LED 37a displays a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is out of order, the variable display is made in which the same main symbols are not arranged.

Although details will be described later, when a game ball enters the lottery device 300 in a state where the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set to the front route, the game ball is arranged on the front side of the entrance port distribution unit 340. The player will enter either the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504 that is present, and whichever of the entrances he/she enters, after the big hit, the special symbol shifts to a high probability state. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the lottery device 300 with the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b set to the front route, the time-shortened ball entrance provided on the back side of the entrance entrance distribution unit 340. 501 or the probability variation entrance ball opening 503 will be entered, and there is a possibility of shifting to a low probability state of a special symbol after a big hit. Therefore, winning the “big hit A” is more advantageous to the player than winning the “big hit B”, and thus the player is expected to play the game expecting to win the “big hit A”. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/3 on the upper side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is cyclically scrolled from the top to the bottom for variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that it is in a state where it is easier to make a transition to a big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of times of entry is four. Suspended, the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each one reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the displayed number of the reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved spheres is one, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. Further, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and three times are reserved. It may be set to the number below or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the second entrance 67 is being performed, As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. The state is set (opened), and as a result, the ball enters the first ball inlet 64 easily. The number of times the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reserve lamp 84. It Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 as in the first entrance 64, and the maximum number of reserved balls is not more than 3 times or not less than 5 times. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

To the right of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, a lottery device 300 is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a high probability state of special symbols after the jackpot is over. This lottery device 300 is provided with a lottery gate 310 that is opened based on winning the jackpot (see FIG. 5). While the lottery gate 310 is opened, the lottery gate 310 is entered. Based on the game ball sphered entering any of the probability variation entrance ports 502 to 504 inside the lottery device 300, after the jackpot is over, the special symbol moves to a high probability state. On the other hand, if the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 enters the time saving slot 501 inside the lottery device 300, it moves to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot and during a predetermined number of fluctuations. (For example, the number of fluctuations is 100 times) It becomes a time saving state of a normal symbol.

Details of the lottery device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an appearance of the lottery device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the lottery device 300 includes a lottery gate 310, a flow path 320, a traveling direction distribution unit 330, a ball entrance distribution unit 340, and a ball discharge unit 350. The game ball entering the gate 310 is discharged to the outside of the lottery device 300 through the ball discharge unit 350 via the flow path 320, the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the entrance distribution unit 340.

Flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are provided inside the moving direction distribution unit 330, and the flow-down position of the game ball is distributed to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341 according to the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. It is possible to switch between the back side and the back side. Further, a distribution rotator 341 is swingably disposed inside the entrance distribution unit 340. Although details will be described later, the distribution rotating body 341 is provided with four passages (induction passages 408a to 408d), and each passage is associated with the time saving entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504. Has been.

The cover portion 332, which is an outer wall portion of the traveling direction distributing portion 330, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b arranged inside the traveling direction distributing portion 330 are both transparent members (for example, PS material). It is composed of. Similarly, the cover portion 423, which is the outer wall portion of the ball entrance distribution section 340, and the distribution rotator 341 arranged inside the ball entrance distribution section 340 are also made of transparent members. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the distribution rotator 341 during the game. As a result, the player can confirm the game ball passing through the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b and the distribution rotary body 341, so that the game ball is the time saving ball entrance 501 and the probability variation ball entrances 502 to 504. It is possible to visually check which of the entrance ports the player enters. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is reached after the jackpot is over. In addition, since it is possible to visually check the flow of the game ball, it is possible to expect the player to enter any of the certainty variation ball entrances 502 to 504 while the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Furthermore, by letting the player visually check the flow of the game balls until they enter any of the entrances, it is possible to recognize that the lottery is being conducted fairly, and It is possible to suppress the distrust of the machine 10 and the hall.

Next, the flow path 320 provided in the lottery device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the flow path 320 and the operation of the game ball that has advanced to the flow path 320. As shown in FIG. 6A, the flow path 320 has a guide passage 321 through which the game balls entered from the lottery gate 310 pass, and a guide passage 322 that guides the passing game balls to the traveling direction distribution unit 330. Either one of the passage 323 for discharging the passing game ball to the discharge port for discharging to the outside, the guide passage 322, or the passage 323 for discharging the ball is closed, and the game ball is advanced to one of the passages. And a passage shut-off valve 324 for switching the valve. The passage closing valve 324 is driven by a solenoid (not shown), and moves toward the direction of FIG. 6A (that is, the guide passage 322 is opened and the ball discharging passage 323 is closed) based on the winning of the jackpot. It switches to.

After winning the jackpot, the game ball that first enters the lottery gate 310 and flows down the guide passage 321 reaches the passage closing valve 324 (FIG. 6A), and the short closing valve 324b of the passage closing valve 324. To contact. Since the passage closing valve 324 is configured to rotate about the shaft 324c, the gaming ball comes into contact with the short closing valve 324b, and the load due to the weight of the gaming ball is applied to the short closing valve 324b. A force that pushes the closing valve 324b downward is applied, and the short closing valve 324b rotates until it contacts the inner wall of the guide passage 322. By rotating the short closing valve 324b, the game ball advances to the guide passage 322, the guide passage 322 is closed by the long closing valve 324a, and the ball discharging passage 323 is opened (FIG. 6(b)). ..

The guide passage 322 is closed by the long closing valve 324a, and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened. Then, all the game balls that enter the lottery gate 310 and flow down the guide passage 321 are the ball discharge passage 323. It will be discharged via (FIG. 6(c)). As a result, it is possible to limit the number of game balls that can proceed to the guide passage 322 to one ball, so that the game balls that proceed to the ball entrance distribution unit 340 disposed in the subsequent stage of the guide passage 322 can be reliably performed. It can be limited to one ball only. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that a plurality of game balls enter the ball entry port 501 or the probability variation entry ports 502 to 504 a plurality of times.

In the present embodiment, the passage closing valve 324 is configured to rotate by the weight of the game ball, but the passage of the game ball is detected by using a known sensor means or the like, and guidance is performed based on the detection result of the sensor means. It may be configured to control opening and closing of the passages 322 and 323. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8, as a modification of the flow channel 320 of the first embodiment, a configuration of the flow channel 320 using a sensor means will be described.

FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are schematic diagrams schematically showing a configuration in which the number of game balls that can proceed to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 and beyond using the sensor means can be limited to one. In the flow path 320 of this modified example, a sprocket 601, ball passage sensors 602a and 602b, a lever 604, and a ball passage sensor 603b are provided between the guide passage 321 and the guide passage 322, and the passage closing valve is further provided. This is different from the first embodiment in that the short closing valve 324b is not provided in 324.

When the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 travels through the guide passage 321 and reaches the sprocket 601, the projection 601a of the sprocket 601 prevents the game ball from proceeding. For the game ball whose progress is stopped by the sprocket, whether or not the game ball is allowed to flow down is determined based on the detection result of the ball passage sensor 602a. Specifically, after the lottery gate 310 is opened, the passage of the ball is allowed until the passage of the ball is detected by the ball passage sensor 602a, the sprocket 601 is rotated clockwise by the motor means, etc. The guide passage 321 can flow down.

When the game ball flows down the 1-ball guide passage 321, the ball passage sensor 602a detects the flow of the ball, and the convex portion 601a of the sprocket 601 projects into the guide passage 321. Therefore, the game balls that enter the lottery gate 310 and flow down the guide passage 321 are all blocked by the convex portion 601a of the sprocket 601.

On the other hand, the game ball whose passage is detected by the ball passage sensor 602a is blocked again by the lever 604 (FIG. 7A). The lever 604 operates so as to close or open the flow path according to the states of the ball passage sensor 602b, the ball passage sensors 603a and 603b, the passage closing valve 324, and the like.

First, the lever 604 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft 604 based on the fact that the ball passage sensor 602b detects that the ball has reached the upper portion of the lever 604. Then, when the lever 604 is sufficiently rotated and does not obstruct the passage, the game ball stopped at the upper part of the lever 604 starts to flow down again (FIG. 7(b)). Then, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the guide passage 322 is detected by the ball passage sensors 603a and 603b, the lever 604 rotates clockwise around the shaft 604a and protrudes again into the guide passage 321. This prevents the progress of other game balls. Further, based on the detection results of the ball passing sensors 603a and 603b, the passage closing valve 324 is tilted toward the ball discharging passage 323, and the ball discharging passage 323 is opened (FIG. 7(c)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls other than the game balls that have advanced to the guide passage 322 from proceeding to the guide passage 322, and to discharge the game balls from the ball discharge passage 323.

While the passage closing valve 324 is tilted, the lever 604 is controlled not to operate (that is, the guide passage 322 is kept closed) regardless of the detection result of the ball passage sensor 602b. Further, the sprocket 601 rotates clockwise in response to the passage closing valve 324 falling down and the ball discharging passage 323 being opened, and only the game ball 1 ball flows down the guide passage 321. Then, in the state where the passage closing valve 324 has fallen, it is controlled to flow down one game ball each time the passage of the game ball is detected by the ball passage sensors 602a and 602b (FIG. 8(a), FIG. 8(b)).

As described above, the configuration of the flow path 320 for advancing the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later has been described, but the configuration of the flow path 320 is the same as that of the present embodiment. It is not limited. As an example of another configuration, for example, instead of the passage closing valve 324 of the first embodiment, it is possible to prevent passage of the game ball downstream from the shaft 324c of the passage closing valve 324 by one game ball. By providing a shutter and closing the shutter part, the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 is configured so that only one ball stays at the shutter part. Since only one game ball space is provided in the shutter part, by stopping the game ball in the shutter part, other game balls cannot be stopped in the shutter part connected to the guide passage 322. Proceed to the ball discharge passage 324. Then, the shutter portion may be opened after a lapse of a sufficient time after the lottery gate 310 is closed, and the game ball retained in the shutter portion may be advanced to the guide passage 322. According to this structure, it is possible to limit the number of game balls that advance to the distribution rotor 341 to one.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the traveling direction distribution unit 330 into which the game ball that has flowed down the guide passage 322 of the flow path 320 enters will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the traveling direction distribution unit 330. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the advancing direction distribution unit 330, the flow path 320 joined to the advancing direction distribution unit 330, and the entrance distribution unit 340 when viewed from the side surface direction of the game board. Note that in both FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B, the base plate 60 is disposed in the rightward direction. As shown in FIG. 9, the traveling direction distribution unit 330 includes flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and a cover unit 332, and the traveling direction of the game ball is in the front direction or the rear direction with respect to the game board. It is something to allocate to either.

Each of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is electrically connected to the flow path solenoid 265, and is configured to tilt and stand still in the same direction. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are tilted to the right (that is, to the back side for the player), the game ball moves to the right (that is, to the back side for the player). ), and flows down to the inner side of the distribution rotator 341. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are tilted to the left (that is, toward the player), the game ball moves to the left (that is, to the player). The front side) is advanced and flows down to the front side of the distribution rotator 341.

Next, the entrance entrance distribution unit 340 of the lottery device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The game ball distribution unit 340 distributes the game balls to one of the time saving game entrance 501 or the probability variation game entrances 502 to 504. In this description, first, an outline of each drawing will be described.

FIG. 10 is a perspective view (FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b)), a side view (FIG. 10(c)), and FIG. 10(c) of the distribution rotator 341 swingably disposed in the entrance distribution unit 340. FIG. 11 is a top view (FIG. 10D), and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the entrance distribution unit 340 as a whole. In addition, FIGS. 12 to 15 schematically show the operations of the allocating rotary body 341 and the game ball when the game ball enters each of the time saving entry port 501 and the probability variation entry ports 502 to 504. It is a schematic diagram. Further, FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the positional relationship between the distribution rotator 341, the time shortening ball entrance 501, and the positive variation ball 502 to 504 when the distribution rotator 341 is viewed from the vertical direction. Is.

The distribution rotator 341 is configured to have four guide passages 408a to 408d through which game balls can pass (see FIG. 10(b)). In addition, the distribution rotator 341 is configured to be swingable in the left-right direction about the shaft 406, and the game balls can pass through the guide passages 408a and 408b depending on the direction in which the inductor 341 swings. And, the state where the game ball can pass through the guide passages 408c and 408d is switched, and in the initial arrangement, the game ball can pass through the guide passages 408a and 408b (that is, shown in FIG. 10A). It is in a state of swaying to the right). It should be noted that the initial arrangement is returned by the turning motor 264 when the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on. In addition, the game ball that has reached the distribution rotating body 341 does not enter the respective entrances (the time saving entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504) and jumps out of the entrance distribution unit 340. In order to prevent this, the distribution rotor 341 is surrounded on all sides by the cover portion 423.

Although the details will be described later, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b, the inductor 341 swings by the weight of the ball by the game ball descending the inclined portion 403b and reaching the ball stopper 403a and becoming stationary. , The guide passage 408c, 408d is switched to a state in which the game ball can pass (FIG. 10(b)). Further, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408c, the derivative 341 swings by the weight of the ball by the game ball descending the inclined portion 405b and reaching the ball stopping portion 405a and standing still, and the guide passage 408a, The game ball switches to 408b (FIG. 10A). When the game ball passes through the guide passages 408a and 408d, the distribution rotor 341 does not swing and the state does not switch.

As shown in FIG. 11, the distribution rotator 341 stands still inside the entrance distribution unit 340 in a state of being tilted to the left (FIG. 11B) or to the right (FIG. 11A). If the player is standing still in a state of leaning to the left (FIG. 11A), the upper ends of the guide passages 408c and 408d are located directly below the entrance 411, so the game that has passed through the entrance 411 The sphere passes through the guide passage 408c or 408d. On the other hand, when the distribution rotator 341 is stationary while tilted to the right (FIG. 11(b)), the upper ends of the guide passages 408a and 408b are located right below the entrance 411, The game ball that has passed 411 passes through the guide passage 408a or 408b.

The game ball that has passed through the guide passage 408a enters the time saving ball entrance 501 and is discharged to the outside via the ball discharge passage 419. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage 408b enters the probability variation entry ball opening 502, and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 416. Furthermore, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage 408c enters the certainty variation entrance ball opening 503, and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 417. Then, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage 408d enters the certainty variation ball inlet 504 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 418. Which of the ball entrances the player has entered is detected by the prize sensors 420a to 420d provided in the ball discharging passages 416 to 419 in the subsequent stage of each ball entrance. Based on the detection results of these winning sensors 420a-420d, it is determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot. Further, the ball discharging passages 416 to 420 are configured to join the ball discharging passage 421 at the downstream side. The ball discharge passage 421 is provided with a discharge ball sensor 422 for detecting a game ball to be discharged.

A magnet 407a is provided on the side surface side of the allocating rotary member 341 and 15 mm upstream from the shaft 406 that supports the allocating rotary member 341. A magnet 407b is provided on the inner wall portion of the cover 423 of the entrance distribution unit 340 at a position overlapping the magnet 407a in a state where the distribution rotator 341 is not swung to the right or left (upright state). Has been. Further, the magnets 407a and 407b are installed so as to repel each other when the distributing rotary body 341 swings and rotates to a position where it is in an upright state. Therefore, even if the distribution rotor 341 oscillates about the shaft 406 due to vibration applied to the distribution rotor 341, the magnet 407a provided on the side surface of the distribution rotor 341 and Since the magnet 407b provided on the inner wall portion of the ball mouth distribution portion 340 repels each other, the distribution rotating body 341 can be prevented from rotating beyond the portion of the magnet 407b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution rotary body 341 from being switched even though the game ball has not passed through the guide passage 408b or 408c. The magnets 407a are provided on the front side and the back side of the distribution rotary body 341, respectively. Similarly, the magnets 407b are provided on the front side and the back side of the cover portion 423, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 15, the operation of the distribution rotary body 341 and the game ball when the game ball passes through each passage of the distribution rotary body 341 will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 12, when the game ball advances to the guide passage 408a (that is, the direction of travel of the game ball is distributed to the back by the direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotor 341 is tilted to the right). (When it is in a closed state).

The game ball that has proceeded to the guide passage 408a (FIG. 12(a)) flows down the back side of the passage wall 402 along the floor portion 401 (FIG. 12(b)) and falls from the lower end of the sorting rotary body 341. Then, the ball enters the time saving ball entrance 501 and passes through the ball discharging passage 419. For this reason, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408a, the special symbol moves to a low-probability state after the jackpot is over, and during a predetermined number of times of variation (for example, the number of times of variation is 100), it becomes a time saving state of an ordinary symbol. .. Since the flow path passing through the guide passage 408a simply flows down along the floor portion 401, a force for swinging the distribution rotating body 341 works when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408a. In other words, the distribution rotator 341 continues to maintain the state of being oscillated to the right (that is, the state where the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the ball entrance 411 will pass through one of the guide passages 408a and 408b. A partition plate 412 is provided below the distribution rotator 341 (see FIG. 11). By this partition plate 412, the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408a is prevented from entering the probability variation entrance 502 on the front side without entering the time shortening entrance 501 on the back side.

Next, referring to FIG. 13, when the game ball advances to the guide passage 408b (that is, the direction of travel of the game ball is distributed to the front by the distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotor 341 is moved to the right). (When it is in a tilted state).

When the game ball enters the guide passage 408b, first, the game ball reaches the ball stopper 403a via the floor 401 and the slope 403b. Since the ball stopper 403a extends in the vertical direction with respect to the floor portion 401 (that is, the direction vertical to the traveling direction of the game ball), the game ball is prevented from proceeding and is in contact with the ball stopper 403a. To stand still (Fig. 13(a)). Then, when the game ball rests on the ball stopping portion 403a, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopping portion 403a, and a force for pushing down the ball stopping portion 403a works.

When the ball stopping portion 403a is pushed down, the sorting rotary body 341 rotates about the shaft 406, and the orientation becomes as shown in FIG. 13(b). When the orientation of FIG. 13B is reached, the ball stopper 403a is in a state of inclining to the lower right in FIG. 13B, so that the game ball flows down along the inclined portion 413 to the positive variation ball entrance 502. The ball enters and passes through the ball discharging passage 416. For this reason, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b, after the jackpot is over, it shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol. It should be noted that the distribution rotator 341 continues to maintain the state where the game ball is swayed to the left as shown in FIG. 13C (that is, the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the ball entrance 411) even after the game ball has dropped. .. Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the ball entrance 411 will pass through one of the guide passages 408c and 408d. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided in the lower part of the distribution rotary body 341 (see FIG. 11), the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408b enters the positive variation ball entrance 501 on the front side. It is possible to prevent the player from entering the short time ball entrance 501 on the back side without doing so.

Next, referring to FIG. 14, when the game sphere advances to the guide passage 408c (that is, the direction of travel of the game sphere is distributed backward by the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotator 341 is moved to the left). (When it is in a tilted state).

When the game ball enters the guide passage 408c, first, the game ball reaches the ball stopper 405a via the floor 401 and the slope 405b. Since the ball stopper 405a extends in the vertical direction with respect to the floor 401 (that is, also in the direction vertical to the traveling direction of the game ball), the game ball is prevented from advancing and is in contact with the ball stopper 405a. To stand still (Fig. 14(a)). Then, when the game ball rests at the ball stopping portion 405a, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopping portion 405a, and a force for pushing the ball stopping portion 405a downward is exerted.

When the ball stopper 405a is pushed down, the distribution rotor 341 rotates about the shaft 406, and the orientation is as shown in FIG. 14(b). When the orientation of FIG. 14(b) is reached, the ball stopper 405a is inclined downward to the left in FIG. 14(b), so the game ball flows down along the inclined portion 414 and enters the positive variation ball entrance 503. The ball will pass through the ball discharging passage 417. For this reason, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408c, the state shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over. In addition, the distribution rotator 341 continues to maintain the state where the game ball is swayed to the right side as shown in FIG. 14C (that is, the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the ball entrance 411) even after the game ball is dropped. Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the ball entrance 411 will pass through one of the guide passages 408a and 408b. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided in the lower part of the distribution rotary body 341 (see FIG. 11 ), the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408c enters the positive variation ball entrance 503 on the back side. It is possible to prevent the player from entering the probability variation entrance 504 on the near side without doing so.

Next, referring to FIG. 15, when the game ball advances to the guide passage 408d (that is, the direction of travel of the game ball is distributed to the front by the travel direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotor 341 is moved to the left). (When it is in a tilted state).

The game ball that has proceeded to the guide passage 408d (FIG. 15(a)) flows down the front side of the passage wall 402 along the floor 401 (FIG. 15(b)), and falls from the lower end of the distribution rotary body 341. Then, the ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 504 and passes through the ball discharge passage 418. For this reason, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408d, the special symbol moves to a high probability state after the jackpot is over. Since the flow path passing through the guide passage 408d simply flows down along the floor portion 401, a force for rocking the distribution rotating body 341 works when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408d. The distribution rotor 341 continues to maintain the state of being oscillated to the left side (that is, the state where the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the ball entrance 411 will pass through one of the guide passages 408c and 408d. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided in the lower part of the allocating rotary member 341 (see FIG. 11), the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408d enters the positive variation ball entrance 504 on the front side. It is possible to prevent the player from entering the probability variation entrance 503 on the back side without doing so.

As described above, depending on which of the four passages provided in the allocating rotating body 341, the game ball is one of the time-saving entry port 501 and the probability variation entry ports 502 to 504. It is distributed to the entrance of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a positional relationship between the distribution rotator 341, the time saving ball entrance 501, and the probability variation ball entrances 502 to 504 will be described. FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a state in which the distribution rotator 341 swings to the right and stands still, as viewed from the direction of the entrance 411 of the entrance distribution unit 340, and FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a state in which the distribution rotator 341 swings to the left and stands still, as viewed from the direction of the entrance 411 of the entrance distribution unit 340. As shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), the time reduction entry port 501 is provided on the right back side of the distribution rotator 341, and the probability variation entry port 502 is provided on the right front side. Therefore, when the distribution rotator 341 swings to the right, there is a possibility that the distribution rotator 341 will enter either the time saving entrance 501 or the probability variation entrance 502. On the other hand, the probability variation entrance 503 is arranged on the left back side of the distribution rotator 341, and the probability variation entrance 504 is arranged on the left front side. Therefore, when the allocating rotary member 341 swings to the left, there is a possibility that the allocating rotary member 341 will enter either of the probability variation ball entrances 503 and 504.

As described above with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 16, the lottery device 300 determines whether to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol or to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over. It is specified on the basis of the entrance (the time saving entrance 501 or the probability variation entrances 502 to 504) that has entered. The game sphere is distributed to any of the ball entrances according to the state of the flow path by the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the direction of the distribution rotator 341 (rightward or leftward).

The state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched between the front route and the rear route according to the jackpot type that has been won, and the distribution rotor 341 is directed to the guide passage 408a provided in the distribution rotor 341. It changes according to which passage of 408d is taken.

When the game ball passes through the guide passage 408a in a state in which the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the right (that is, the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411), the state of the distribution rotor 341 changes. Without (that is, in a state of being swung to the right side), the game ball enters the time saving ball entrance 501. Therefore, even when the next big hit is won, the distribution rotor 341 is still swung to the right, and if the game balls are distributed to the guide passage 408a again, the special symbols are continuously in a low probability state. There are cases.

Further, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b in a state where the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the right, the distribution rotor 341 rotates leftward about the axis 406 based on the weight of the game ball, and the game ball Enters the probability variation entrance 502. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game balls reach the distribution rotor 341 in a state where the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left (that is, the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, in the next lottery, the game ball enters the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504. In other words, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b, not only the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over, but also in the next jackpot, the high probability state of the special symbol is surely transitioned after the jackpot. Of.

On the other hand, when the distribution rotator 341 is swung to the left (that is, the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411), when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408c, the weight of the game ball is increased. Based on this, the sorting rotator 341 rotates rightward about the shaft 406, and the game ball enters the certainty variation ball inlet 503. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game sphere reaches the allocating rotary body 341 in a state where the allocating rotary body 341 is swayed to the right side (that is, the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, in the next lottery, the game ball will enter either one of the time saving entrance 501 and the probability variation entrance 502. In other words, in the next big hit, there is a possibility that it will shift to a high probability state of the special symbol after the big jackpot ends, or a low probability state of the special symbol.

Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408d in a state where the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left, the state of the distribution rotor 341 does not change (that is, the game ball is swung to the left). Enters the probability variation entrance 504. Therefore, even when the next big hit is won, the distribution rotator 341 remains in a state of being swung to the left side, so in the next lottery, one of the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504 is played. The ball will enter. In other words, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408d, not only the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends, but also the next big jackpot always moves to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends. Of.

In this way, if the distribution rotary body 341 is swung to the left side, even if the game ball passes through either of the guide passages 408c and 408d, the special symbol always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, so the player Can confirm that the result of the lottery by the lottery device 300 is a high probability state of the special symbol, only by confirming that the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left, and the lottery by the lottery device 300 can be performed. You can check the situation with confidence.

On the other hand, when the distribution rotator 341 is in a state of being swung to the right side, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the special symbol high probability state. Therefore, the lottery result by the lottery device 300 is changed to the special symbol high probability state. It will be confirmed while embracing both the expectation for transitioning and the anxiety about transitioning to the low probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, by confirming the direction of the allocating rotating body 341, if it swings to the left, it gives the player a sense of security, and if it swings to the right, it gives the player an expectation and anxiety. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with a sharpness.

Furthermore, if the game ball is distributed to the guide passage 408b or the guide passage 408d, not only the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit Momo will be decided, so the player is guaranteed the big hit of this time, the next big hit, and the three big hits that will be won in the high probability state of the special symbol that shifts after the next big hit. It is possible to recognize that the player is present, give a great satisfaction to the player, and improve the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first entrance switch. A lottery for special symbols is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after the predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (a big hit of eight rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 8 times (8 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open/close plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is achieved. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a while opening the opening 65a. It may be formed.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 19A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. At least the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is stored.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 (not shown) is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 19B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is set for each big hit type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 19(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is set for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In the main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance ball entrance. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored at the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, the sphere is left and right. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is special. When it matches the value of the random number which is a jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol. Also, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability of special symbols (the period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and when the probability is high that the jackpot of special symbols is high (special symbol). Of high random number) and the number of random numbers included in each of which are jackpots are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbols and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbols are in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value is returned to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of special symbols, there are three random numbers that are big hits for special symbols, and the random number value "7,107,282" is a special symbol for low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 3, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/100".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values are “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299" is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Stored in. In this way, at the time of high probability of a special symbol, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 30, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

In the present embodiment, a random number value that is a big hit stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, and a random number value that is a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Then, the random numbers that are big jackpots are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random number value for jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that the random number value is input from the outside and the jackpot is likely to be illegally assigned. On the other hand, like the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value to be a big hit is changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 19B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the big hit type is "big hit A". When the value is “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random number value), the random number value for determining the big hit type of the special symbol is set by the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 19(b)). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "rear out of reach" (eg 98, 99), and after the same reach is reached, the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol "reach other than out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97), Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability time and a special symbol for low probability time, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, or the like.

For example, in a high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that a range of random values corresponding to the “completely out” stop type is 0 to 89 and a wide range table for high probability is used so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the "rearward/rearward reach" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than front/rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear/rear outreach" or "reach other than front/rear outreach". In the low probability state, when the probability of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is assured, the random number range corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is as small as 0-79. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front/back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front/rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-position reach" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (not shown) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. There is.

In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection super reach", "disconnection special reach" "Various patterns are defined, as a variation pattern for both jackpot A and jackpot B, "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined. Various types of "reach" are stipulated, and various types of variation patterns for common use between hit and miss are stipulated, such as "common normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach". Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by a normal symbol per random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is a normal symbol. When it matches the value of the random number that is a hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined as a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table, for low probability of the normal symbol (the period when the normal symbol is in a normal state), and when the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that at the time of low probability (at the time of the normal symbol) It is divided into two types, that is, for a period of time saving state), and the number of big numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers to be a hit, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 19(c), at a low probability of a normal symbol, there are 24 random number values that are the hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, the probability of a jackpot of a regular symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random number values that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random table per normal symbol for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, so the probability of being a jackpot of a normal symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 is a regular symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second×2 times”. In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second×2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

It should be noted that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 32). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 17, a special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. 203e, a time saving medium counter 203f, a round number counter 203g, a lottery flag 203h, an opening flag 203i, and a rotating body flag 203j.

The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the 4th reserved area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then (moved), based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is made.

When the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize) and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start prize, the jackpot lottery with the original special symbol is immediately performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is performed. Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, as various information, hit/miss, stop type, variation pattern, and the like are applicable.

Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and uses them as the prize information in the prize information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) similarly to the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding Among the vacant areas of the (4th area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having an area number that is smaller by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first inlet 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 1 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 26).

The value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 in FIG. 26, see S405 in FIG. 28). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to hold to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved sphere number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved sphere number notified by the display reserved sphere number command.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is a variable display holding sphere number (standby) of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the fact that the game sphere passes through the second ball inlet 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times up to four times. This normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time the game ball passes through the second entrance 67, and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 1 They are added (see S704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 29).

When the sphere passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, a second random number per The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S705 of FIG. 30). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through either the right or left second entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. Not performed (S703: No in FIG. 30).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the probability variation flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation of the special symbol. If the probability variation flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). This probability variation flag 203e has an initial value set to zero, and in the lottery by the lottery device 300 performed based on the jackpot of the special symbol, that the game ball has entered any of the probability variation entrance ports 502 to 504. Is turned on (S1614 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203e is turned off when a game ball enters the time saving entrance 501 in the lottery by the lottery device 300 (S1620 in FIG. 35).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if that state is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203e. If is off, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability.

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The time saving medium counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and in a lottery by the lottery device 300 performed based on the jackpot of the special symbol, a specific value based on the game ball winning the hour saving prize hole 501. (For example, 100) is set (see S1620 in FIG. 35). After that, until the value of the hour/hour counter 203f becomes 0, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol variation effect ends (S214 in FIG. 26).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for a normal symbol is performed based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0, the ordinary symbol is selected based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 29).

The number-of-rounds counter 203g is a counter that indicates the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and the value of the number-of-rounds counter 203g indicates the current number of rounds in the jackpot game. The value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and the value is incremented by 1 at the start of each round.

The lottery flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing to perform the lottery by the lottery device 300, and is turned on when it is the timing to perform the lottery. On the other hand, the lottery flag 203h is turned off after making various settings for starting the lottery by the lottery device 300. That is, the lottery flag 203h is a flag that is turned on only after it is determined that it is the time to perform the lottery by the lottery device 300 and before the lottery is actually started.

The opening flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened. When the opening flag 203i is on, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open, and when it is off, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is closed. The opening flag 203i is normally set to OFF, and is turned on after the opening of the lottery gate 310 is set in the various settings at the time of performing the lottery by the lottery device 300 (S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, when the lottery device 300 detects the lottery and the lottery gate 310 is closed, the lottery device 300 is turned off (S1608 and S1609 in FIG. 35).

The rotator flag 203j is a flag indicating the direction of the allocating rotary body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300, and when the position of the allocating rotary body 341 is shifted before and after the power is turned on, the allocating rotation is performed. It is used to return the arrangement of the body 341 to the state before the power is turned off. If the rotating body flag 203j is on, it indicates that the distribution rotating body 341 is swinging to the left, and if it is off, it indicates that the distributing rotation body 341 is swinging to the right. The rotator flag 203j is switched in association with the arrangement of the sorting rotary body 341 by the position detection sensor 263, and the sorting rotary body 341 is swung leftward by the position detection sensor 263 (backward state). The rotary body flag is turned on when it is detected that it is present, and is turned off when it is detected that the distribution rotary body 341 is swung to the right (frontward state).

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. As a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in the lottery device 300 are driven to flow a game ball. A flow path solenoid 265 for switching the path is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115, and each entrance of the lottery device 300. A winning sensor 420 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a position detection sensor 263 for detecting the orientation of the distribution rotor 341 in the lottery device 300, and a rotation motor 264 for correcting the orientation of the distribution rotor 341 are connected. The MPU 201 performs various processes based on signals output from various switches 208, a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253, a ball entry signal output from the prize sensor 420, a detection signal from the position detection sensor 263, and the like. To execute.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 are controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

A fluctuation pattern table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a special effect flag 223e. ing.

The fluctuation pattern table 222a is a table used for determining the mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the rough variation pattern mode such as “outside normal reach”, “shared normal reach”, “shared special reach” and the like. The fluctuation pattern table 222a is used to determine a detailed mode of the fluctuation pattern based on the rough fluctuation pattern mode notified by the fluctuation pattern command. A plurality of detailed variation pattern aspects that can be selected are defined for each of the different aspects.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From the, various information obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is changed to the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b, like the special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol holding number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. Is becoming

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball inlet 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The number is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1407 in FIG. 40). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used to display the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2701 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1404 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 43). The stop type selection flag 223d is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

The special effect flag 223e is in a state in which the distribution rotor 341 disposed inside the lottery device 300 is swung to the left (see FIG. 11A), and the game ball can enter in the next lottery. In the case where the mouth is either the probability variation entry ball opening 503 or the probability variation entry ball opening 504 (that is, the state in which it is determined that the high probability state of the special symbol is determined in the next lottery by the lottery device 300) , A flag for performing the variation pattern effect in a special mode different from usual. The special effect flag 223e is turned on when the loop state command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S3702 in FIG. 42), and turned off when the normal state command output from the main control device 110 is received. (See S3704 in FIG. 42).

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply unit 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors and the like, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages in succession, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND type flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is first stored after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be set within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c or less, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

By the way, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 44) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 24) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one of the frames of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction, so that the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

An image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction and transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address and the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect in the case of being performed.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 44).

Here, referring to FIG. 21, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. FIG. 21 shows that the display control device 114, immediately after the power is turned on, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 is displayed in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image of a “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” is displayed as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. The result is judged, and if it is "a big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 21(b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, a power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21B and 21C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect by using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as main symbols without numbers "0" to "9", main symbols consisting of rear symbols such as a wooden box, characters such as rear symbols and planers, furoshiki, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without the number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the device 114 stores it in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for the previously developed one frame is read out from the other frame buffer, and to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are displayed for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and for example, a variable effect and a round effect. , The display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is jackpot A, big hit B If any of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed.

As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect was stopped. That is, the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information and the filter designation information, with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This rear surface type displays one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the rear surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by this back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

As for the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information by managing the offset information with the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, and the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 14) is the The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time specified by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data that means is defined (corresponds to the address "0002H" in FIG. 23).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. To execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display controller 114 displays display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 21A to 21C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main processing executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 44) (see S1805 in FIG. 44). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 55B).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 of FIG. 46B), and If the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 of FIG. 46(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 46B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 46(b) S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 55A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55(b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) in which the instruction contents of the image drawing for the is written is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for completing the drawing process of the image for one frame (see In step S2103), the pointer update process (see FIG. 54) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 (see S3201 in FIG. 54).

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such updating of the pointer 233f is performed, and the drawing list to be described later. (Refer to FIG. 24), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 24, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), number of reserved balls, symbol 1, number of reserved balls, 2,... For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. In addition, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 of FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3513 in FIG. 56). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 56). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "ON", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and the image is displayed to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 46B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 57).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 37. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and then A start winning process associated with a win (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the passage through the gate through the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing a big jackpot of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the big hit is A or the big hit B.

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that although the display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a big hit for the special symbol (S211: Yes), the lottery flag 203h is turned on (S212), and this processing is ended.

In the processing of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S213), and the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S213: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S214), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the value of the various counters stored in the "special symbol jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment judgment), while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of a fluctuating effect that is referred to.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a are acquired. Yes (S301).

Next, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S302). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values stored in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, the random number that is a big hit for the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability is stored in the low-probability first random number table 202a, and is “7, 107, 282”. , The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78. , 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299". ..

Further, whether the current is a low probability state of a special symbol or a high probability state of a special symbol can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is a high probability state of a special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is a low probability state of a special symbol. In the process of S302, the value of the first per random number counter C1 is compared with the random value stored in the first per random number table 202a according to the state of the probability variation flag 203e, and if these values match, a special Judged as a jackpot for the design.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S302: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 ( S303). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and a special symbol of two types (a big hit) It is determined which one of A and jackpot B) is a jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined to be the big hit A (front route big hit), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the big hit. It is determined that it is B (big hit in the back route) (see FIG. 19B).

In the process of S303, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, a stop symbol common to the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S304). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S304, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, the variation patterns for disengagement are defined as "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection superreach", and "disconnection special reach". As for the variation pattern of jackpot A and jackpot B, "common normal reach" types, "shared super reach" types, "shared special reach" types are defined, and jackpot A variation patterns are "special reach" types. Is defined, and as the variation pattern for common use between hit and miss, various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of place (S302: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front/rear outreach, the reach other than the front/rear outreach, or the complete outreach is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability are compared. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", the complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", the reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S306). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variable time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S304, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

When the process of S304 or the process of S306 is completed, next, a change pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S304 or the process of S306 is set (S307). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or S305 is set (S308). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). It The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S308 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. The processing for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), this process is terminated and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the number of reserved balls command is set in the process of S405, the RAM 203 is set to the respective values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. It is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, the winning/non-winning of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not it is a jackpot), its stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and its variation pattern are predicted. Yes (S407). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the random number value stored in the per first random number table 202a (see FIG. 19A). It is determined by comparing with (winning value) one by one. As described above, the random number that is a big hit for the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability is stored in the low-probability first random number table 202a, and is “7, 107, 282”. , The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78. , 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299". ..

Further, whether the current is a low probability state of the special symbol or a high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability change flag 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is a high probability state of a special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is a low probability state of a special symbol. In the processing of S407, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value stored in the first random number table 202a corresponding to the state of the probability variation flag 203e, and if these values match, the special Judged as a jackpot for the design.

When it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol big hit type table, Of the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (a big hit when the flow path in the lottery device 300 is switched to the front root, a big hit on the front root). However, if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that the jackpot B is a jackpot B (a jackpot in which the flow path in the lottery device 300 is switched to the jackpot, a jackpot jackpot) (see FIG. 19B).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front/rear reach is reached. It is determined whether it is a reach, a reach other than the front/back deviation, or a complete deviation. Here, if the probability variation flag 203e is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability probability stop type selection table, Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", it is determined to be a complete deviation, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", it is determined to be a reach other than a deviation from the front and rear. However, if it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front and rear reach is reached. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203e is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined to be a complete deviation, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", it is determined to be a reach other than the front and rear deviation. However, if it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front and rear reach is reached.

Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is a variation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202, and a predicted lottery result or a predicted stop type (in the case of a big jackpot, a jackpot type). It is selected accordingly. In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection super reach", "disconnection special reach" "Various patterns are defined, as a variation pattern for both jackpot A and jackpot B, "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined. Various types of "reach" are stipulated, and various types of variation patterns for common use between hit and miss are stipulated, such as "common normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach". Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

By the processing of S407, whether or not the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the variation pattern are predicted, then, whether or not the predicted lottery is won and the predicted stop type, The winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

The winning information command set here is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning/disapproval, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and stores the information as prize information in the prize information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64 are attached. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory which accompanies the first entrance 64 is made while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

When the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S609). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing a big jackpot of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent the ball, which is about to win the special winning opening 65a, from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 64 is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

In the process of S609, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random symbol per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", Usually, it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 19C).

In the process of S608, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", Usually, it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 19C).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S612), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even if it hits the ordinary symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory accompanying 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of place (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour/hour medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the ordinary symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, The release period of the first entrance 64 is extremely long, which is "0.2 seconds x 1 → 1 second x 2", so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol stops in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) in the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1009) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S625, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) is executed next. Is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 25), determines whether or not a ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if there is a ball, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of times of variable display holding in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed the second ball inlet 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the second ball inlet 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S913. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S914, S915) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is similarly performed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, in the rotating body position initialization processing of S910 (see FIG. 33), the position of the allocating rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300 is changed as necessary. To fix. After the end of the rotating body position initialization process (S310), the process proceeds to S911, where a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and various operations are performed for the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Execution of the effect is permitted (S911). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the rotating body position initialization processing (S910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this rotating body position initialization processing (S910).

As described above, this rotating body position initialization processing (S910) is processing for correcting the position of the allocating rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300 as necessary. The case where the correction is necessary is, for example, a case where the arrangement of the allocating rotary body 341 is changed between the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the time when the power is next turned on. The distribution rotors 341 can be arranged as shown in FIG. 11(b) and in a state of being swung to the right (a state of facing up) and in a state of being swung to the left (a state of facing down) (see FIG. 11). (See (a)) and. The state of swinging to the right (the state of facing up) is when initialization is performed (that is, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on), or the game ball. Is when the guide passage 408c provided in the distribution rotor 341 has passed (see FIG. 14). On the other hand, the state of being swung to the left side (the state of being face down) is when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b provided in the sorting rotary member 341 (see FIG. 13).

In the rotating body position initialization processing (S910), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1501), and when it is determined that it is turned on. (S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to S1502. On the other hand, in the processing of S1501, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, it is off), it is further determined whether the rotating body flag 203j is turned on (S1503) and turned on. If not (that is, off), the process proceeds to S1502.

In the processing of S1502, the rotation motor 264 for rotating the distribution rotary body 341 is driven to arrange the distribution rotary body 341 in a state of being swung to the right side (face-up state) (see FIG. 11B). The shaft 406 is rotated so as to become (S1504), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the start-up process.

In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is on (S1503: Yes), the state of the sorting rotating body 341 before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 is swinging to the left (backward). State), the rotation motor 264 for rotating the sorting rotary body 341 is driven to swing the sorting rotary body 341 to the left side (face-down state). (See FIG. 11A), this process is terminated and the process returns to the startup process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1009 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1012 and S1013 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) and the start winning process (see FIG. 28), the reserved ball number command and the winning information command are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened or closed. A lottery gate process is executed (S1004). In the lottery gate process (S1004), the jackpot stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated (that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the high-probability state is selected by lottery). The lottery gate 310 is opened at the timing performed by the lottery device 300). If it is detected that a game ball has entered the lottery gate, or if the maximum opening time of the lottery gate 310 (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery gate 310 is closed. Furthermore, in this processing, it is detected which of the time saving entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 the game sphere entered into the lottery gate 310 is, and the game sphere is The processing is performed according to the entrance that entered the ball. In the present embodiment, the lottery gate process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

When the lottery gate process (S1004) is finished, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed, and the big hit control for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is performed. The process is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a rotor position detection process is performed to determine the arrangement of the sorting rotor 341 disposed inside the lottery device 300 based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263 (S1006). In the present embodiment, the rotating body position detection process (S1006) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

When the rotating body position detection process (S1006) ends, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1007). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 29). The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1008). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S304 or the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the change is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can check the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S304 or the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends, the first symbol display device End the variable display being executed in 37, in the display mode set by the process of S303 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S305, the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1009). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, if the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 29), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1011). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1011: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1011: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1012, S1013).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1012). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1009 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1010, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 31 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1014 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1014), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1015). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1016), the access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1017), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S1010 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1009 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1012 and S1013 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, in the initialization process (S901), the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the lottery gate processing (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this lottery gate processing processing (S1004). This lottery gate process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and controls the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 for lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. This is a process for detecting the entrance of a game ball that entered the lottery gate 310.

In the lottery gate process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery flag 203h is on. When it is determined that the lottery flag 203h is turned on (S1601: Yes), it indicates that it is the timing to start the lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, and therefore the lottery device 300 performs the lottery. Various settings are made (S1602 to S1604), the lottery flag 203h is turned off (S1605), and this processing is ended.

In addition, in various settings for performing lottery by the lottery device 300, first, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the jackpot type (S1602). Specifically, if the big hit type is "big hit A", the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b are set to the front route, and if the big hit type is "big hit B", the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b are set in the back. Set to root. After the processing of S1602 is completed, the opening of the lottery gate 310 is set so that the game ball can enter the inside of the lottery device 300 (S1603). After that, the opening flag 203i is turned on to indicate that the lottery gate 310 is opened (S1604), and various settings are completed.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1601, when it is determined that the lottery flag 203h is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the open flag 203i is on, and the open flag 203i is When it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S1606: No), the processing of S1607 to S1612 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1613. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening flag 203i is on (S1606: Yes), it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is opened, and thus it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the lottery gate 310. Yes (S1607).

In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S1607: Yes), the game ball necessary for performing the lottery by the lottery device 300 has entered the lottery device 300. Therefore, in order to prevent the game ball from entering the lottery device 300 thereafter, the lottery gate 310 is closed (S1608), the open flag 203i is turned off (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1613. ..

In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the lottery gate 310 (S1607: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (S1610). Here, the condition that the lottery gate 310 is closed in the state where the game ball does not enter the lottery gate 310 is that the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed. When it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is not satisfied (that is, it is within the maximum opening time of the lottery gate 310) (S1610: No), the process proceeds to S1613. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (that is, the maximum opening time of the lottery gate 310 has passed) (S1610: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned off and the time saving medium counter 203f is displayed. 100 is set (S1611), and the short-term big hit game is set (S1612). Then, the lottery gate is closed (S1608), the opening flag 203i is turned off (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1613.

In the processing of S1613, based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered any one of the probability variation entrance openings 502-504 (S1613). When it is determined that the player has entered any of the probability variation entrance openings 502-504 (S1613: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned on (S1614) and the start of the probability variation jackpot game is set (S1615). Then, it is determined whether or not the entrance into which the game ball has entered is the probability variation entrance 503 (S1616), and when it is determined that it is the probability variation entrance 503 (S1616: Yes), the voice lamp control A normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the device 113 (S1618), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1616, when it is determined that the entrance into which the game ball entered is not the probability variation entrance 503 (that is, the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504) (S1616: No), a loop status command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1617), and this processing ends.

Here, the normal state command and the loop state command will be described in detail. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the probability variation entry ball opening 503, the distribution rotator 341 is swung to the right based on the fact that the game ball passes through the guide passage 408c ( (See FIG. 14). When the distribution rotator 341 is swung to the right, in the next lottery by the lottery device 300, the game ball is the time-saving ball entrance 501, which is the entrance provided on the right side of the lottery device 300, or the positive change. Since it will enter any of the ball openings 502 (see FIG. 16 (a)), after the next big hit is not necessarily moved to the high probability state of the special symbol, the game ball is a time-saving entry When entering the mouth 501, the state shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504, the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left (see FIGS. 13 and 15 ), so the lottery device 300. In the next lottery at the time of a big jackpot, the game ball is distributed to the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504 which is the entrance provided on the left side of the lottery device 300. (See FIG. 16(b)), after the next big hit, the special symbol shifts to a high probability state. That is, as compared with the case where the game ball enters the probability variation entrance port 503, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the probability variation entrance port 502 or the probability variation entry ball port 504.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the player has entered the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504 (S1616: No), the voice lamp control device 113 is in a loop state that is advantageous for the player. It is configured to transmit a command (loop state command) indicating that the transition to (4). Then, as will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 41, the voice lamp control device 113 indicates to the player that the current state is advantageous, based on the reception of the loop state command. The production (loop state production) is configured to be executable. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the present state is advantageous by the occurrence of the loop state effect which is an effect different from the normal one, and thus the loop state which is an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that it is in an advantageous state even though it is in the middle.

On the other hand, when it is detected that the player has entered the probability variation ball entrance 503 (S1616: Yes), the normal state indicating that the current state is not the loop state (that is, the normal state) is given to the voice lamp control device 113. It is configured to send commands. The voice lamp control device 113 can determine whether to execute the loop state effect based on which of the normal state command and the loop state command is received.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1613, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the probability variation entrance ports 502 to 504 (S1613: No), whether or not the game ball has entered the time saving entry port 501. Is determined based on the detection result of the winning sensor 420c (S1619), and when it is determined that the player has not entered the time saving slot 501 (S1619: No), the present process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the processing of S1619, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the time saving entry port 501, the probability change flag 203e is turned off because the special symbol low probability state is set after the jackpot, and the hour saving medium counter 203f. Is set to 100 (S1620), and the start of the time saving jackpot game is set (S1621). Then, a normal state command for notifying that the current state is not the loop state (that is, the normal state) is set as the command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1622), and this processing is ended.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1005). This jackpot control processing (S1005) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 34), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S1612, S1615, or S1621 of the lottery gate process (see FIG. 35) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. To do. In the process of S1101, when the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0 (S1102), and this process is finished. This round number counter 203g determines the number of rounds that are in a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1103). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing a big jackpot of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1103: No), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, if the special symbol is a big hit (1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After setting the round number command, 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 203g to match the round number of the newly started round with the value of the round number counter 203g (S1107), and this processing ends. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls If, for example, 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S1108, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1108: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1109), and the round number counter 203g It is determined whether the value is 8 (S1110). In the processing of S1110, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is not 8 (that is, any of 1 to 7) (S1110: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S1110: Yes), it is the end timing of 8 rounds (that is, the final round), so the end of the jackpot is set (S1111), and The process ends and returns to the main process.

Next, the rotating body position detection processing (S1006) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this rotating body position detection processing (S1006). This rotating body position detection processing (S1006) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 34), the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is stored in the rotating body flag 203j, and the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Also, this is a process for enabling the arrangement of the allocating rotating body 341 to be returned to the same arrangement as that immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored.

In this rotator position detection processing (S1006), first, it is determined whether or not the rotator flag 203j is on (S2501). As a result of the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is not on (that is, it is off) (S2501: No), the arrangement of the allocating rotating body 341 is in the frontward state in the previous rotating body position detection processing ( It is indicated that the current position of the allocating rotary body 341 is the face-up condition (the condition of oscillating to the right) based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263. It is determined whether or not the arrangement of the distribution rotor 341 has changed between the previous rotor position detection process and the current rotor position detection process (S2502).

Then, when it is determined that the current arrangement of the allocating rotary body 341 is the face-up state (the state of oscillating to the right) (S2502: Yes), the allocation of the allocating rotary body 341 is the time point of the previous rotary body position detecting process. Since this has not changed, this processing ends and returns to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current arrangement of the allocating rotary body 341 is the face-down state (the state of being oscillated to the left) (S2502: No), the allocating rotary body 341 is moved from the time of the previous rotary body position detecting process. Since this indicates that the arrangement has changed, the rotator flag 203j is turned on (S2503), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is on (S2501: Yes), based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, the current arrangement of the allocating rotating body 341 is in the face-up state (to the right). It is determined whether or not it is in a shaken state (S2504), and when it is determined that the current arrangement of the allocating rotary body 341 is in a state of being face down (a condition in which it is swung to the left) (S2504: No), the distribution is performed. Since the arrangement of the rotating body 341 has not changed from the time of the previous rotating body position detection processing, this processing is terminated and returns to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current placement of the allocating rotary body 341 is the face-up state (the state of oscillating to the right) (S2504: Yes), the placement of the allocating rotary body 341 from the time of the previous rotary body position detecting process. Indicates that the rotating body flag 203j has changed, the rotator flag 203j is turned off (S2505), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 38, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1316 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time (see FIG. 39). It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1313 of FIG. 39), the power-off process of S1316 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1316 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1202: No), the startup processing this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S1316 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the startup process of this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S1316 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1316, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read/write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1316 is executed (see S1315 of FIG. 39). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1316 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1208 is momentarily performed when the startup process of this time is performed while the power-off flag is turned on. This is the case where after the power failure occurs, the process is started in a state where the execution of the power-off process of S1316 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process of S1204 to S1206 is performed to execute the process of S1208. This is the case when the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1209 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204 when the processing of S1208 is reached from the processing of S1204 through the processing of S1206. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time has been executed (S1301), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the processing proceeds to S1311 without performing the processing of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process of S1302 to S1310 related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S1311 and the variable display setting processing of S1312 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the reserved quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed and controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame effect 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage change process is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the display control device 114 causes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of the variation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It is also possible to change to a holding effect and to use the frame button 22 as an enter button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1308), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output processing of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process of performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the command determination process (S1311) ends, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

After the processing of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1313 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off process is executed (S1316). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1317), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1313 (S1313: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination processing (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 39) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. Processing.

In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation pattern selection process for selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command is executed (S1402), and the process returns to the main process. The fluctuation pattern type selected here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1403). When the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The variable display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1407). In the process of S1407, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1407 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize) or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the start prize Each time is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1407 to the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, at the time of detecting the start winning or special At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1407 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1406, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1406: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1408: Yes), various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted from the received winning information command as winning information (S1409). After the processing of S1409 ends, next, the winning information (winning/non-hit, stop type, variation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1409 is the first in the empty areas (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. It is stored in the area (S1410) and the process returns to the main process.

In the process of S1408, when the winning information command is not received (S1408: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1411). When the round number command is received (S1411: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1412), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( (S1413), the present process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1411, if the round number command is not received (S1413: No), then special effect setting processing for determining whether or not the current state is the loop state is executed (S1414). .. Based on the determination result by this special effect execution processing, it is determined whether or not to perform a special effect that suggests a loop state that is a state advantageous to the player.

When the process of S1414 ends, it is then determined whether or not another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received result is executed, and the process ends (S1419). For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed controlled. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a variation pattern selection process (S1402) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1402). This variation pattern selection processing (S1402) is executed in the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1402 in FIG. 40), and as described above, the main control device 110. It is the process for selecting the type of the variation pattern executed in the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern command from.

In the variation pattern selection process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2701), and then it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is on (S2702).

If it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is ON, the variation pattern type for the loop state is extracted from the variation pattern types based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 (S2703). , This process ends. In the process of S2703, in addition to the variation pattern types that are selected even in the normal state, the variation pattern types that are not selected in the normal state can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that it is in a special state by selecting a variation pattern effect in a mode dedicated to the loop state different from the normal state and displaying it on the third symbol display device 81. .. In addition, with the mode only for the loop state, for example, during the fluctuation of the third symbol, a character that does not appear in the normal state appears, a pattern different from the normal state is displayed, a sound effect different from the normal state, and the like. For example, a voice effect is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2702: No), the normal state of the variation pattern types based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is set. The variation pattern type for use is extracted (S2704), and this processing ends. Based on the variation pattern type extracted by the processing of S2703 or S2704, the variation pattern effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current state is the loop state based on the state of the special effect flag 203e, and when it is determined that the current state is the loop state, The mode of the variation pattern effect for suggesting that the present state is advantageous is configured to be selectable. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the present time is in an advantageous state by executing the variation pattern effect in a manner different from the normal state, and thus the loop state is an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that it is in an advantageous state even though it is in the middle.

In the loop state, the variation pattern type selected in the normal state may not be selected at all. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the current state is in the loop state by only performing the variation pattern effect once. It is possible to more reliably prevent players from quitting the game without noticing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special effect setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process (S1414). This special effect setting process (S1414) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1414 in FIG. 40), and as described above, the current state is It is a process for determining whether or not it is in a loop state and executing the variable pattern effect in an effect mode according to whether or not it is in a loop state.

In the special effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a loop state command is received (S3701). The loop state command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504 in the lottery gate processing (see FIG. 35) described above. It is a command that is output, and is a command indicating that the state has shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol not only after the big hit this time but also after the next big hit.

When it is determined that the loop state command has been received (S3701: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned on to indicate that the loop state is currently set (S3702), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the loop state command has not been received (S3701: No), then it is determined whether the normal state command has been received (S3703). The normal state command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the time saving entrance 501 or the probability variation entrance 503 in the lottery gate processing (see FIG. 35). It is a command that is output, after the next big hit is a high probability state of the special symbol, and is a command that indicates that the transition to the normal state that may transition to any of the low probability state of the special symbol ..

When it is determined that the normal state command has been received (S3703: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned off to indicate that the current state is not the loop state (S3704), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S3703, when it is determined that the normal state command has not been received (S3703: No), this processing ends as it is.

As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41), the state of the special effect flag 223e set in this process is determined, and the variation pattern is executed in the special mode for the loop state, or the variation pattern for the normal state is executed. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is to be executed. As a result, during the loop state, the variation pattern effect is executed in a manner different from usual, so that the player can easily recognize that the present state is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that the current state is the loop state even though the current state is the loop state.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This fluctuation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41) S2703 or S2704 is performed. In, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated and set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area→execution area, second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1405 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

Next, the extracted stop type is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the display stop for notifying the display control device 114 based on the set stop type. A type command is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1710), and this processing ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 57. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address designated by the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program, so that the NOR ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1902, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S1903). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing required for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 44). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S1801) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot processing, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 45, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed subsequent to the process of S1902. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. Alternatively, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1902 and S1902.

As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, returning to the description of FIG. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set in each flag. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). This transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1803, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1804, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 55A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 55A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 21 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46(b)). The determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 46B) are executed.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without any fear that the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency can be prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and the main control device 110 issues a voice lamp control to start the variation effect. When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 21B and 21C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, and the time during which the main image is continuously displayed after the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1805, the interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 46(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2102) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2103) is executed.

In the command determination processing (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, the processing according to the command is executed, and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51.

In the display setting process (S2103), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54.

After the display setting process is executed, next, the task process is executed (S2104). In this task processing, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting processing (S2103) or the simple display setting processing (S2109). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview production or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2104), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105). 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. Examples of the counter updated by the process of S2107 include a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/outside reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside, complete disconnection) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2101: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the S2104 of FIG. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51, details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S2102) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 47, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2203).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

Details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is not possible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is erroneously displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in case of determining that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variation display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S2301 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2303, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the fluctuation pattern command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2302. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the above table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S2304 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the process of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206), If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (various jackpots, front/rear outreach, reach other than front/rear outreach, or complete out) is determined (S2401). , The stop type table and the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46(b)) is compared, and the fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop design after the effect is finally set (S2402).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to OFF (S2403), and this processing ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-described task process (S2104), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a time of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2402.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" will be displayed, and the player will be confused that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol jackpot", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2208), If there is a display round number command (S2208: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2209) and the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S2601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2602).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the processing of S2208, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2210), and the back If there is an image change command (S2210: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2211) and the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). .. Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2802), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set by the process of S2802. .. Then, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing (S2104), when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image determination flag set in S2802. From that, the type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM address of the normal video RAM 236 corresponding to the specified back image is specified. To do.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the effects of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the process of S2210, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2212), and there is an error command. If (S2212: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, details of the error command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S2902), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in step S2902 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the process of S2212, if it is determined that there is no error command (S2212: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to S2201.

In the processing of S2201 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), and the processes of S2202 to S2219 are executed again. Then, the processing of S2201 to S2219 is repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the processing of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 21, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command are displayed. Only the type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 48) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 49), which are the processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and other commands are executed. Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 48) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2301. Further, since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , S2302, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3001), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing (S2104), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer updating process. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f is updated past the address at which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3203), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3206), the present process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3202: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the display setting processing.

Here, returning to FIG. 52, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinates of each sprite are specified. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the final display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the finalization display flag is off (S3009: No), the finalization display effect is not yet effected, and the finalization effect is the timing, so the finalization data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The data is set (S3010), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol final display effect in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. In addition, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is turned on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. 21. A process of setting the display data table that defines that the image (one of FIGS. 21B and 21C) to be stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 55(b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S3402 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the processing proceeds to S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the unresident A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 of FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 of FIG. 46B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S3301: No in FIG. 55(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, and display by the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, the display controller 114, and the like are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the determination is made, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing will cause It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2103). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and then receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S3506 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3506: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the processing proceeds to S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S3508), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3507: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3509). If the back image change flag is not on but on (S3509: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is turned on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is turned off (S3510), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

In the process of S3513, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3513 (S3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3513, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3514). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S3514, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer processing, if the back-side image is changed based on the reception of the back-side image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the back-side image is changed. The image data used in the image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the above-described drawing process (S2106) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2104). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the rearranged sprites are sorted in the detailed order for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and those information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 46B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, after the jackpot is determined to be the "special symbol jackpot" and the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is confirmed and displayed, the lottery device 300 specially hits the jackpot after the jackpot. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the symbol. In this lottery, the game ball entered in the lottery device 300 is entered into any of the plurality of entrances (the time saving entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504) arranged in the drawing device 300. Whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol is determined based on whether or not the player enters the ball entrance. In addition, the lottery device 300 is provided with flow path switching valves 331a and 331b that control the traveling direction of the game balls that have entered the lottery device 300, and a distribution rotor 341, and the game is played according to these states. The entrance for the ball is decided.

The state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is determined according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). The direction is switched (see FIG. 9B). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the game balls are switched to a direction in which the gaming balls flow down to the inner side of the distribution rotor 341 (see FIG. 9A). The state of the distribution rotor 341 is switched depending on which of the four guide passages 408a to 408d provided in the distribution rotor 341 the game ball passes through.

Specifically, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408a in a state in which the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the right (that is, the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411), the distribution rotor is The state of 341 does not change (that is, in the state of being swung to the right side), and the game ball enters the time saving ball entrance 501. Therefore, even when the next big hit is won, the distribution rotor 341 is still swung to the right, and if the game balls are distributed to the guide passage 408a again, the special symbols are continuously in a low probability state. There are cases.

Further, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b in a state where the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the right, the distribution rotor 341 rotates leftward about the axis 406 based on the weight of the game ball, and the game ball Enters the probability variation entrance 502. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game balls reach the distribution rotor 341 in a state where the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left (that is, the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, next time, the player will enter either the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504. In other words, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408b, not only the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over, but also in the next jackpot, the high probability state of the special symbol is surely transitioned after the jackpot. Of.

On the other hand, when the distribution rotator 341 is swung to the left (that is, the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411), when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408c, the weight of the game ball is increased. Based on this, the sorting rotator 341 rotates rightward about the shaft 406, and the game ball enters the certainty variation ball inlet 503. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game sphere reaches the allocating rotary body 341 in a state where the allocating rotary body 341 is swayed to the right side (that is, the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, next time, the player will enter either the time saving entrance 501 or the probability variation entrance 502. In other words, after the big hit this time, it moves to the high probability state of the special symbol, but in the next big hit, the possibility of moving to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, to the low probability state of the special symbol There is a possibility that it will shift.

Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408d in a state where the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left, the state of the distribution rotor 341 does not change (that is, the game ball is swung to the left). Enters the probability variation entrance 504. Therefore, when the jackpot is won next time, the distribution rotor 341 is still swung to the left side, so next time, enter either the probability variation entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504. Becomes In other words, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408d, not only the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends, but also the next big jackpot always moves to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends. Of.

In this way, if the distribution rotary body 341 is swung to the left side, even if the game ball passes through either of the guide passages 408c and 408d, the special symbol always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, so the player Can confirm that the result of the lottery by the lottery device 300 is a high probability state of the special symbol, only by confirming that the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left, and the lottery by the lottery device 300 can be performed. You can check the situation with confidence.

On the other hand, when the distribution rotator 341 is in a state of being swung to the right side, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the special symbol high probability state. Therefore, the lottery result by the lottery device 300 is changed to the special symbol high probability state. It will be confirmed while embracing both the expectation for transitioning and the anxiety about transitioning to the low probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, by confirming the direction of the allocating rotating body 341, if it swings to the left, it gives the player a sense of security, and if it swings to the right, it gives the player an expectation and anxiety. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with a sharpness.

Furthermore, if the game ball is distributed to the guide passage 408b or the guide passage 408d, not only the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit Since the winnings will be confirmed, the player is guaranteed the big hits of this time, the next big hit, and the three big hits that will be won in the high probability state of the special symbols that will shift after the next big hit. That is, the player can be made aware of this, a great feeling of satisfaction can be given to the player, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the allocating rotary body 341 is in a state of being swayed to the left, it shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol after the next big hit. That is, since the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously won, it becomes a very advantageous state for the player. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to suggest to the player that it is in an advantageous state, it is possible to select a variation pattern effect that is different from the normal mode. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the present time is in an advantageous state by executing the variation pattern effect in a manner different from the normal state, and thus the loop state is an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that it is in an advantageous state even though it is in the middle.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery device 300 is arranged in the right direction when viewed from the front with respect to the variable display unit 80, but the present invention is not limited to this position, and the game ball can enter the lottery gate 310. As long as it is a proper position, it may be arranged at any position. Further, the lottery gate 310 is configured by a lid-shaped gate as shown in FIG. 6, but instead of this, a shutter-shaped gate that opens and closes up and down may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution rotor 341 is configured so that it can be switched to a state in which it is swung to the right or to a state in which it is swung to the left in accordance with the guide passage through which the game ball has passed. In the next lottery after the game ball entered, the probability change state of the special symbol is continuous by making it possible to enter only the probability change entrance 503 or the probability change entrance 504. Although it is configured to win two or more times, it may be realized in a controlled manner.

For example, the first hit type selection table 202b, the first hit type selection table 202b1 for the first hit (when the big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol), and the high probability state of the special symbol The first loop type selection table 202b2 for the case may be provided. In this case, the first hit type selection table 202b1 for the first hit, transition to a high probability state of the special symbol, in the next lottery the big hit and the first hit type selection table 202b2 for loop state is used, and the special symbol The jackpot to be moved to the low probability state is defined, while the first hit type selection table for loop state 202b2 is shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol, but is the first hit in the next lottery. For the jackpot that the first hit type selection table 202b1 for use and a high probability state of special symbols are moved to, and a big jackpot that the first hit type selection table 202b2 for the loop state is used for the next lottery as well Good.

In the present embodiment, the lottery device 300 is configured to perform the lottery before the jackpot game is started, but the lottery device 300 may be configured to perform the lottery during the jackpot game. For example, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 may be opened in the first round.

In this case, the discharge ball detection sensor 422 of the lottery device 300 may be configured to give a prize ball to the player each time one game ball is detected. Then, in the round in which the lottery is executed, the lottery gate 310 is opened until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won, similar to the operation of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the other rounds. It may be configured to be performed. That is, in the round in which the lottery is performed, the lottery device 300 also serves as the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. By performing the lottery by the lottery device 300 during the jackpot game, it is possible for the player to prevent the jackpot game from being a work merely to obtain a payout, and improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game. be able to.

Further, when the lottery device 300 is configured to perform the lottery during the jackpot game, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a may be closed in the round in which the lottery is performed. That is, the lottery device 300 may be configured to have a role of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. In this case, the lottery device 300 is defined as the first specific winning opening and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is defined as the second specific winning opening, and the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening are determined according to the jackpot type. You may comprise so that the pattern of opening may be changed. The flow channel setting may be switched for each round.

For example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b are set to the front route in the first round, and the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b are set to the rear route in the second round. If the jackpot type is a jackpot A, only the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is set to be opened in one round, and only the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is opened in the second to eighth rounds. Set to enable. Since the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is opened only in the first round in which the front route is set, the game ball always advances in the front route in the lottery by the lottery device 300.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B, only the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is set to be opened in the first round and the third to eighth rounds, and the first specific winning opening (lottery is selected in the second round). Only the gate 310) for use is opened. Since the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is opened only in the second round in which the inner route is set, the game ball always advances in the inner route in the lottery by the lottery device 300.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64. In the above-described first embodiment, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, only two types of jackpot A and jackpot B are provided, and the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched according to the jackpot type.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the jackpot A and the jackpot B, the jackpot C which is the jackpot of the round number 2R, the jackpot D, and the jackpot A and the jackpot which are the jackpots of two rounds. B is provided.

Small hit A, small hit B, the state does not change after the end of each small hit, if you win any small hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, low special symbol after the end of the small hit Probability state is maintained, conversely, if you win any of the small hits in the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the small hit. In addition, when one of the small hits is won in the time saving state, the game is started from the continuation of the time saving state even after the small hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the small hit is won, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened before the small hit is started, and the operation of the lottery gate 310 is as follows. , It is exactly the same as when the big hits A to D are won. The difference between the small hit and the big hit is that the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 are discharged from the ball discharge passage 323 without proceeding to and after the traveling direction distribution unit 330. That is, the player cannot recognize whether the winning is a big hit or a small hit until it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball advances to the proceeding direction allocating unit 330 or later.

Therefore, when the lottery gate 310 is opened, the player first expects that the game ball progresses to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 and thereafter (that is, the hit this time is one of the big hits). , When the game ball progresses to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later, it is expected that the game ball will enter any one of the probability variation entrance ports 502 to 504. Furthermore, after the jackpot game is started, You will play with the expectation that it will be a big jackpot of eight rounds. Therefore, the player's expectation can be increased regularly, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration is that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 are partially changed in the main controller 110. That is, a small hit type selection table 202e is added, and a small hit flag 203k is provided in the RAM 203. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and a part of the process included in the main process (FIG. 34) are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, the other processes executed by the main controller 110, the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment is provided with a small hit flag 203k in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit flag 203k is a flag indicating whether it is the opening timing of the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 when the small hit is won, and is turned on when it is the timing of opening the lottery gate 310. It On the other hand, the small hit flag 203k is turned off after setting the opening of the lottery gate 310.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 shows a configuration of the ROM 202 included in the control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a small hit type selection table 202e is provided in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (FIGS. 59(a) and 59(c)). In addition, in the first hit type selection table 202b, in addition to "big hit A" and "big hit B", tables of "big hit C" and "big hit D" are added, which is the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. Different from 10.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 39" is "big hit A". .. Further, when the random number value is "50 to 89", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Further, when the random number value is "40 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot C", and when the random number value is "90 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot D". The "big hit C" and "big hit D" added in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment are big hits with a maximum round number of two.

"Big hit C" and "big hit D", after the winning of the big hit is confirmed, in the transfer lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol performed by the lottery device 300 (see FIG. 5), the flow path switching valve 331a, There is a difference between the flow path through which the game ball passes by 331b (see FIG. 9) and the flow path on the front side of the rotating body 341 (front route) or the flow path on the back side (back route). That is, the "big hit C" is switched to the front side flow path (front route) (see FIG. 9B), and the "big hit D" is switched to the back side flow path (back route) (FIG. 9). (See (a)).

The “big hit C” and the “big hit D” are big hits with a smaller number of rounds than the “big hit A” and the “big hit B” (that is, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is small), and thus the lottery device 300. If the big hit game starts when the game ball enters the inside and the game ball enters any of the entrances, the player can expect to pay out more prize balls in 8 rounds. We expect a big hit ("big hit A" or "big hit B"). Therefore, if the player wins eight rounds as expected, greater satisfaction can be provided.

The small hit type selection table 202e defines the random number value of the first winning random number counter C1 when a small hit is won for each small hit type (FIG. 59(c)). In the first hit random number counter C1, the small hit type when the random number value is "15 to 24" is "small hit A". Further, when the random number value is "141 to 150", the small hit type is "small hit B".

As described above, the “small hit A” and “small hit B” are the ones whose state does not change after the end of each small hit, and when one of the small hits is won in the low probability state of the special symbol, the small hit The low probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the win, and conversely, if you win one of the small hits in the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the small hit. .. In addition, when one of the small hits is won in the time saving state, the game is started from the continuation of the time saving state even after the small hit.

In addition, the “small hit A” and the “small hit B” are when the lottery device 300 (see FIG. 5) opens the lottery gate 310 after the winning of the small hit is confirmed (to a high probability state). Whether to make the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (see FIG. 9) the front side flow path (front route) when performing a fake operation that does not actually carry out the lottery by pretending to perform the transition lottery There is a difference in whether to use the flow path on the back side (back route). That is, the "small hit A" is switched to the front side flow path (front route) (see FIG. 9B), and the "small hit B" is switched to the back side flow path (rear route) ( FIG. 9A).

In reality, even if each small hit is won, the game ball does not proceed to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 and the passages where the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b are arranged, so that the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b are not advanced. Even if you switch, it does not directly affect the game, but by performing the switching operation of the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b as in the case of winning various jackpots, it is a big hit or a small hit. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether there is any or not, and to keep the expectation for winning the jackpot longer.

<Regarding control processing in the second embodiment>
Next, various kinds of processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), in each process of S201 to S211, and S213, S214, each process of S201 to S211 and S213, S214 of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. The same process as is executed. And in the special symbol variation process in the second embodiment, in the process of S211, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is determined not to be a jackpot of the special symbol. (S211: No), next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a small hit of the special symbol (S221). If it is determined that the special symbol is not a small hit (S221: No), the process proceeds to S213. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit (S221: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is turned on (S222), and the present process is ended.

By turning on the small hit flag 203k, in the small hit gate process (S1021) described later with reference to FIG. 62, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened before the small hit starts, and the special symbol It can be made to appear as if a lottery for transitioning to the high probability state of. Therefore, it is possible to delay the timing at which the player can recognize whether the winning is the small hit or the big hit, so that the player's expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the high probability state of the special symbol are kept longer. You can put it on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the main processing of main controller 110.

Among the main processes of the main controller 110, in each of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to the main process of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 34), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1017 is executed. Then, in the main process of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1004 is completed, the small hit gate process (S1021) is executed. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, the small hit gate process (S1021) opens the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 when the small hit is won, and shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol. This is a process for operating as if a lottery was performed.

When the small hitting gate process ends, next, the big hitting control process 2 (S1022) is executed instead of the big hitting control process (FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. The big hit control process 2 is, similar to the big hit control process (FIG. 36), a process for executing various effects according to the big hit and for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a.
Furthermore, when the big hit control process 2 (S1022) ends, the small hit control process (S1023) is executed. The small hit control process (S1023) is a process for executing various effects depending on the small hit and for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When the small hit control process (S1023) is completed, the process proceeds to S1006.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the small hit gate process (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control measure 110 will be described. As described above, the small hit gate process (S1021) opens the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 when the small hit is won, and draws as if the special symbol moves to the high probability state. Is a process for operating as if.

In the small hit gate process (S1021), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is turned on (S3801). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S3801: Yes), based on the fact that the small hit is won, the setting for performing the fake of the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol is performed. Specifically, first, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the route determined according to the small hit type (S3802), and the lottery gate 310 is opened (S3803). Next, the open flag 203i is turned on (S3804), the small hit flag is turned off (S3805), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is not on (that is, it is off) (S3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the open flag 203i is on (S3806), and the open flag 203i is If it is on (S3806: Yes), it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open, and therefore it is determined whether or not a ball entering the lottery gate 310 has been detected (S3807).

When it is detected that the game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S3807: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is closed so that the game ball does not additionally enter the lottery gate 310 (S3808). The open flag 203i is turned off, and the process proceeds to S3812.
On the other hand, when it is not detected that the game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S3810: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (S3810). The closing condition of the lottery gate 310 other than the entry of the game ball is that the maximum opening period (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed.

As a result of the process of S3810, when it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (S3810: Yes), the start of the small hit game is set (S3811), and the lottery gate 310 is closed ( (S3808), the open flag 203i is turned off (S3809), and the process proceeds to S3812. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is not satisfied (S3810: No), the processes of S3808, S3809, and S3811 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3812. In addition, in the process of S3806, when it is determined that the open flag 203i is not on (that is, it is off) (S3806: No), the processes of S3807 to S3809 are skipped and the process of S3812 is performed.

In the process of S3812, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge passage 323 (S3812), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge passage 323, the small hit game is started. The setting is made (S3813), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball discharging passage 323, the present process is ended.

If the start of the small hitting game is set at the timing when the ball entering the lottery gate 310 is detected, the small hitting game will be started immediately before it is determined whether the gaming ball reaches the traveling direction distribution unit 330, There is a possibility that the player recognizes that the current hit is a small hit without giving a sense of expectation that the game ball moves to the moving direction distribution unit 330, which may detract from the interest. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if it is a small hit, the small hit game is not started until it is determined that the game ball entering the lottery gate 310 has passed the ball discharge passage 323. By delaying the timing at which it is possible to determine whether it is a small hit or a big hit, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the big hit for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a jackpot control process 2 (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 2 (S1022).

In the jackpot control process 2, each process of S1101 to S1111 is the same as each process of S1101 to S1111 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. Then, in the jackpot control processing 2 in the second embodiment, when the processing of S1109 is completed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1121), and jackpot A or jackpot B. If determined (S1121: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit this time is neither big hit A nor big hit B (that is, big hit C or big hit D) (S1121: No), then whether the value of the round number counter is 2 or not. (That is, whether or not it is the second round) (S1122), and when the value of the round number counter is 2 (that is, the second round) (S1122: Yes), the number of rounds. Means that it is the end timing of the big hit C or the big hit D, which is the big hit of two rounds, so the process shifts to S1111 and the end of the big hit is set (S1111), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not 2 (that is, 1) (S1122: No), the jackpot game in the second round remains, and thus the present process is ended.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, jackpot types having different numbers of rounds are provided, but by performing the processing of S1121 and S1122 of this jackpot control process 2 (S1022), the jackpot game of the number of rounds according to the jackpot type. Can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a small hit control process (S1023) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this small hit control processing (S1023). As described above, the small hit control process (S1023) is a process for executing various effects according to the small hit and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

In the small hit control process (S1023), first, it is determined whether it is the small hit A or small hit B start timing (S3901). The start of the small hit is set in the process of S3811 or S3813 of the small hit gate process (see FIG. 62).

As a result of the processing of S3901, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit A or the small hit B (S3901: Yes), the value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is neither the start timing of the small hit A nor the start timing of the small hit B (S3901: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit game is currently in progress (S3903).

If it is determined that the small hit game is not currently being played (S3903: No), this process ends and returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit game is currently being played (S3903), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S3904). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S3904), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S3905), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set ( S3906). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After setting the round number command, 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 203g to match the round number of the newly started round with the value of the round number counter 203g (S3907), and this processing ends. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S3904, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S3904: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S3908). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls If, for example, 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S3908, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S3908: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S3908: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S3909), and the round number counter 203g It is determined whether the value is 2 (S3910). In the processing of S3910, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not 2 (that is, 1) (S3910: No), this processing ends and returns to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S3910: Yes), since the end timing of the second round (that is, the final round) is currently set, the end of the small hit is set (S3911), This process ends and returns to the main process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, as a type of “special jackpot”, the jackpot game round is eight rounds of jackpot A and jackpot B, and the jackpot game round. Has two rounds of jackpot C and jackpot D. By providing a two-round jackpot with a small number of prize balls that can be acquired, it is possible to allow a player to play a game with the expectation that the player wins the eight-round jackpot with a large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, when the jackpot of eight rounds is won as expected by the player, a greater satisfaction can be given to the player. That is, by providing the jackpot C and the jackpot D with a small number of balls, the joy of winning the jackpot A and the jackpot B with a lot of balls is increased, and the thanks of the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be enhanced.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a small hit A and a small hit B are provided in addition to the various big hits. If you win the various jackpots, based on the lottery result performed by the lottery device 300, after the jackpot transition to a high probability state of the special symbol, or transition to a low probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol time saving state However, in the case of a small hit, the state immediately before winning the small hit is continued after the end of the small hit game. That is, when the small hit A or the small hit B is won, the lottery device 300 does not carry out a lottery as to whether or not the special symbol moves to the high probability state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the small hit A or the small hit B is won, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened before the small hit game is started, and the lottery device 300. It is configured so that a game ball can be inserted into the inside of. Further, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are also switched to the front route or the rear route, as in the case of winning the jackpot. Then, the entered game ball is configured to be discharged from the discharge passage 323 without flowing down to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 and thereafter. As a result, even when various small wins are won, it seems to the player that a lottery will be performed as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol by the game ball entered in the lottery device 300. It can be done. Therefore, until the player confirms whether or not the game ball has flowed down to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later, it is not possible to identify whether the winning is a big hit or a small hit, and the expectation for the big hit is large. The feeling can last longer. Then, when the jackpot is a big hit as expected by the player, a greater sense of satisfaction can be given. In other words, by providing a small hit A, small hit B that does not carry out the special symbol high-probability state lottery, the joy of winning various jackpots that may move to the high probability state of special symbols You can increase the value of the various jackpots.

In addition, during the game, the player determines whether the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b provided in the traveling direction distribution unit 330 of the lottery device 300 are in the front route state or the back route state. Can be seen. The player also determines whether the state of the distribution rotor 341 provided in the entrance distribution unit 340 of the lottery device 300 is leftward or rightward. Can be seen. Then, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the inner route and the distribution rotator 341 is swung to the right, the game ball entered in the lottery device 300 is a time saving entrance. I will enter 501. That is, the special symbol is transitioned to a low probability state. Therefore, in such a case, the player feels that the game ball does not want to proceed to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later, and therefore the player enters the lottery device 300 in the expectation that the winning is a small hit. The whereabouts of the played game ball will be confirmed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, from the time when the third symbols are lined up to the time when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched, it is expected to switch to the front route that is in an advantageous state for the player. The player can be allowed to play a game. When the game ball flows down the front route, it will enter either the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504, so that the state of the distribution rotator 341 is swung to the left (FIG. 13). , See FIG. 15), in order to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol in the next lottery.

In addition, after the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the front route, until the game ball enters the lottery device 300, the game ball proceeds to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 and thereafter (that is, this time It is possible to let the player play the game with the expectation that it is a big hit. Further, from the start of the jackpot game until the end timing of the second round, it is possible to make the player play the jackpot game with the expectation of entering the third round. This is because only two types of jackpots, a jackpot of 8 rounds and a jackpot of 2 rounds, are provided, and it is confirmed that the jackpots of 8 rounds are determined at the stage of entering the 3rd round.

On the other hand, when winning the winning (any of the various big hits and various small hits), if the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b are switched to the inner route side, when the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330, It will flow down the inner route. Therefore, the state of the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the right side (see FIGS. 12 and 14), which is a disadvantage compared to the state of being swung to the left side. It is possible to allow the player to play the game with the expectation that the process will not proceed to 330 and after (that is, the current winning is a small hit).

Therefore, depending on the conditions such as the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the state of the distribution rotator 341, it is possible to cause the player to play the game at various timings while giving various expectations to the player. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described second embodiment, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the lottery device 300 for performing the lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol is displayed in front of the variable display unit 80. It was arranged in the right direction of the view, and was configured to perform a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol before the start of the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the jackpot game is started, and the specific winning opening (large When the (opening port) 65a is opened, the lottery device 300 can be filled with game balls.

Since the lottery gate 310 is arranged inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the open/closed state of the lottery gate 310 and the game ball that entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are drawn. It is difficult for the player to see whether or not the player has entered the game gate 310, but with respect to each configuration of the lottery device 300 after the flow path 320, the player can visually recognize the configuration similarly to the other embodiments. There is.

In addition to the lottery device 300, the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a can be discharged into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a when the game balls pass. A ball discharging passage 701 (not shown) is provided, and when the lottery gate 310 is closed, the game balls are discharged through the ball discharging passage 701. .. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lottery gate 310 through the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a when the lottery gate 310 is open, the game ball enters the lottery device 300 through the lottery gate 310. You will be able to play a ball. The game ball that has entered the lottery device 300 is discharged from the ball discharging passage 323 or the ball discharging passage 421. Even when the lottery gate 310 is open, the discharge passage 701 does not enter the lottery gate 310 due to the trajectory of the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. May progress to.

With the above-described configuration, only by launching a game ball aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, it is possible to obtain an opportunity for a lottery by the lottery device 300 while winning the prize ball.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, four types of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D are provided as jackpot types of the special symbols, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b according to the jackpot type. Although the number of rounds in the jackpot game was switched, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, there are 6 types of jackpot types (front route jackpot A, front route jackpot B, front route jackpot C, back route jackpot A, back route). It has been increased to jackpot B and Oku route jackpot C).

The front route jackpot A and the front route jackpot B are jackpots in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is eight. In addition, the front route jackpot C is a jackpot in which the number of rounds of jackpot is two. The front route jackpots A to C open the lottery gate 310 when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set in the direction in which the game balls are distributed to the front route.

The back route jackpot A and the back route jackpot B are jackpots in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is eight. The back route jackpot C is a jackpot in which the number of rounds of jackpot is two. The inner route jackpots A to C open the lottery gate 310 when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set in the direction in which the game balls are distributed to the inner route.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 66, in each jackpot, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the front route or the back route according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in configuration is that the content of the first hit type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 is changed in the main controller 110. , And a small hit flag 203k provided in the RAM 203, a round start flag 203l, a closing flag 203m, a lottery execution flag 203n, a big hit end flag 203o, and a passage opening flag 203p. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the process included in the main process (FIG. 61) are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the second embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment has a round start flag 203l, a closing flag 203m, a lottery execution flag 203n, and a big hit end flag 203o in place of the small hit flag 203k provided in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment. A passage opening flag 203p is provided. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The round start flag 203l is a flag indicating the timing for determining whether or not to open the lottery gate 310, and is turned on when a new round is started in the big hit or the small hit (see S1134 in FIG. 69). , Is turned off after setting the opening of the lottery gate 310 (see S4007 in FIG. 71).

The closing flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not it is time to close the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 in the jackpot game, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed when the round is finished during the jackpot. If it is done, it is turned on (see S1135 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, the jackpot is turned off when the jackpot is started and when the lottery gate 310 is set to be closed.

The lottery execution flag 203n is a flag that indicates whether or not the lottery device 300 has performed a lottery for shifting the special symbol to the high-probability state, and the game ball has a shorter hour entry port 501 or probability variation entry ports 502 to 504. It is turned on when it is detected that the player has entered one of the ball entrances, and is turned off at the start of the jackpot (see S1133 in FIG. 69).

The jackpot end flag 203o is turned on when the jackpot end is set (see S1137 in FIG. 69) and turned off at the start of the jackpot (see S1134 in FIG. 69). Further, the passage opening flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery gate 310 is opened and a game ball can enter the guide passage 321 and is turned on when the lottery gate 310 is opened. (See S4006 in FIG. 71), it is turned off at the start of the big hit or when the lottery gate 310 is closed (see S4005 and S4014 in FIG. 71).

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 shows the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110 according to the third embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b of the second embodiment, the correspondence relationship between the random number value of the first hit type counter and the big hit type is defined, but in the third embodiment, in addition to this, The states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the state of the lottery gate 310 for each round number are defined for each jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the third embodiment, when the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 0 to 9, the front route jackpot A is won. In the front route jackpot A, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round. In addition, in these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and the game ball can enter the guide passage 321.

On the other hand, in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the state of the inner route. In addition, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened in these rounds, so that the game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 10 to 59, the front route jackpot B is won. In the front route jackpot B, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round. In addition, among these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened in a round other than the second round, and the game ball can enter the guide passage 321.

On the other hand, in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the state of the inner route. In addition, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened in these rounds, so that the game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 60 to 69, the forward route jackpot C is won. In the front route jackpot C, in the second round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b is switched to the state of the front route, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and the game ball is guided to the guide passage 321. Can enter. On the other hand, in the first round, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the state of the inner route. Since the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened, the game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 70 to 74, the back route jackpot A is won. In the deep route jackpot A, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the deep route state in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round. In addition, in these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and the game ball can enter the guide passage 321.

On the other hand, in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the state of the front route. In addition, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened in these rounds, so that the game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 75 to 95, the inner route jackpot B is won. Further, in the deep route jackpot B, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the deep route state in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round. In addition, among these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened in a round other than the second round, and the game ball can enter the guide passage 321.

On the other hand, in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the state of the front route. In addition, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened in these rounds, so that the game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 96 to 99, the back route jackpot C is won. In the deep route jackpot C, in the second round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b is switched to the state of the deep route, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and the game ball is guided to the guide passage 321. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, in the first round, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the state of the front route. Since the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened, the game ball cannot enter the guide passage 321.

As described above, even if the lottery gate 310 is open, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a cannot necessarily advance into the lottery gate 310, and the ball discharging passage 701 is provided. There is a case to enter the. In addition, in one round, the round may be completed without entering one ball into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. For these reasons, if the game ball does not enter the lottery gate in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened inside the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a, the player determines the lottery round. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not it is, whether or not it is a jackpot of the front route (a jackpot of the front route A to C) or a jackpot of the back route (a jackpot of the back route A to C) only by checking the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. I can't tell if it is. Therefore, the expectation as to whether or not the current big hit is a big hit on the front route, which is advantageous to the player, can be maintained for a longer time.

When the small hit A is won, the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b is switched in the same manner as the front route big hit C, but the lottery gate 310 is not opened during the small hit. When the small hit B is won, the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b is switched in the same manner as the inner route big hit C, but the lottery gate 310 is not opened during the small hit.

In this way, by making the operations of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b common in a part of the case of a big hit and in the case of a small hit, it is only possible to confirm the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not a hit has occurred. Therefore, the expectation for the jackpot can be maintained for a long time.

The first hit type selection table 202b is not limited to the combination of FIG. For example, the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened may be limited to one round regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the passage switching valves 331a and 331b may be configured to operate in common, and only the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened may be changed.

<Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. First, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed at 81.

In each of the special symbol variation processing (S104), S201 to S211, S221, and S213, S214, S201 to S211, S221, and S213 of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S214 is executed. Then, in the special symbol fluctuation process in the third embodiment, in the process of S211, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol fluctuation start process is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol. In the case (S211: Yes), next, the start of the jackpot game is set (S231), and this processing is ended. Further, in the third embodiment, in the processing of S221, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small prize of the special symbol (S221: Yes), the start of the small hit game is set (S232), This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the main processing of main controller 110.

Of the main processing of the main controller 110, in each of S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1006 of the main processing of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 61), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1017 is executed. Then, in the main process of main controller 110 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is executed instead of jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 63) in the second embodiment. .. Similar to the big hit control process 2 (FIG. 63), the big hit control process 3 is a process for executing various effects according to the big hit and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

When the big hit control process 3 ends, the small hit control process 2 (S1032) is executed instead of the small hit control process (FIG. 64) in the second embodiment. This small hit control process 2 (S1032), like the small hit control process (FIG. 64) in the second embodiment, executes various effects according to the small hit and opens the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Alternatively, it is a process for closing.

When the small hit control process 2 (S1032) ends, then the flow path switching process (S1033) is executed. The flow path switching process (S1033) is a process of setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310. When this flow path switching process (S1033) ends, the small hit setting process (S1034) is executed. The small hit setting process (S1034) is a process of switching the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b during the small hit. When the small hitting setting process (S1034) ends, each process of S1006 and thereafter is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 3 (S1031).

In each of the jackpot control processing 3, S1101 to S1111 and S1122, the same processing as each of the S1101 to S1111 and S1122 of the jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 63) in the second embodiment is executed. It Then, in the jackpot control process 3 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1102 is completed, the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, and the lottery execution flag 203n are turned off (S1131 to S1133). The jackpot end flag 203o and the passage opening flag 203p are also turned off after the processing of S1102 (not shown).

Further, in the jackpot control process 3, when the process of S1105 ends, the round start flag 203l is turned on (S1134), and it is the timing to set the open/closed states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310. After the display, the process proceeds to S1106 and subsequent steps. On the basis of the round start flag being turned on by the processing of S1134, various settings according to the jackpot type are performed by the flow path switching processing (S1033) described later.

Further, in the jackpot control process 3, when the process of S1109 is completed, the closing flag 203m is turned on to indicate the closing timing of the lottery gate 310 (S1135). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is the back route jackpot C or the front route jackpot C (that is, whether it is a two-round jackpot) (S1136). As a result of the processing of S1136, when it is determined that neither the back route jackpot C nor the front route jackpot C (that is, eight rounds of jackpots) (S1136: No), the process proceeds to S1110.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1136, when it is determined that the back route jackpot C or the front route jackpot C (S1136: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the round number counter 203g is 2 (S1122), 2 If not (that is, if 1), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter 203g is 2 (S1122: Yes), the big hit end is set (S1111), the big hit end flag 203o is turned on (S1137), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a small hit control process 2 (S1032) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this small hit control processing 2 (S1032).

In this small hit control process 2, each process of S3901 to S3911 is the same as each process of S3901 to S3911 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 64) in the second embodiment. Then, in the small hitting control process 2 in the third embodiment, when the process of S3902 is completed, the round start flag 203l is turned off (S3921), and this process ends. When the process of S3905 ends, the round start flag 2031 is turned on in order to set the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b according to the small hit type in the small hit setting process (see FIG. 72) described later. (S3922), the process after S3906 is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the flow path switching process (S1033) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this flow path switching processing (S1033). The flow path switching process (S1033) is a process of setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310.

In this flow path switching process (S1033), first, it is determined whether or not the round start flag 203l is on (S4001), and when it is determined that the round start flag 203l is on (S4001: Yes), the jackpot type is determined. The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the first hit type selection table 202b (S4002). For example, when the jackpot type is the front route jackpot B and the value of the round counter 203g is 5 (that is, at the start timing of the fifth round), “▲” in the first hit type selection table 202b. Since it is specified that the flow path is the back route, the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the back route.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the round start flag 203g is turned on at both the round start timing of various big hits and the round start timing of various small hits. Therefore, the round start flag 203g is set based on the round start timing of the small hits. There is a case where the process is turned on to shift to the process of S4002, but in this case, it is configured to determine that it is not a big hit (that is, a small hit) and end this process.

When the process of S4002 is completed, whether or not to open the lottery gate 310 is specified based on the jackpot type and the first hit type selection table 202b (S4003). For example, when the jackpot type is the front route jackpot B and the value of the round counter 203g is 5 (that is, at the start timing of the fifth round), “▲” in the first hit type selection table 202b. Is attached, and it is specified that the lottery gate 310 is closed so that the game ball cannot proceed to the guide passage 323. Therefore, it is specified that the lottery gate 310 is closed. ..

When the process of S4003 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the identification result of whether or not to open the lottery gate 310 indicates the closing of the lottery gate 310 (S4004), and the identification result indicates the closing. If the result is (S4004: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is closed, the passage opening flag 203p is turned off (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4007. On the other hand, when the specific result is not closed, that is, when the lottery gate 310 is opened (S4004: No), the lottery gate 310 is opened and the passage opening flag 203p is turned on (S4006), The process moves to S4007. In the processing of S4007, the round start flag 203g is turned off (S4007), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S4001, when it is determined that the round start flag 203l is not on (that is, it is off) (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the closing flag 203m is on (S4008). When it is determined that the closing flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S4008: No), the processes of S4009 to S4014 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4015.

On the other hand, if the closing flag 203m is on (S4008: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag 203o is on (S4009), and if it is not on (that is, if it is off), the jackpot end timing. Since this means that it is not, the processing of S4010 and S4011 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4012.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end flag 203o is on (S4009: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery execution flag 203n is on (S4010). If the lottery execution flag 203n is turned on (S4010: Yes), a game ball is already in any entrance (any one of the time saving entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504) in the drawing device 300. Since it is determined whether to shift to the high-probability state or the low-probability state of the special symbol after entering the ball and after the jackpot, the process of S4011 is skipped and the process of S4012 is performed.

On the other hand, if the lottery execution flag 203n is off (S4010: No), it means that it is not determined whether to shift to the high-probability state or the low-probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, so it is a big hit. The probability variation flag 203e is turned off, 100 is set in the time saving medium counter 203f (S4011), and the process proceeds to S4012 so that the jackpot does not end without determining the state after the end. That is, if it is not decided whether to move to the high probability state or the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot even at the end of the jackpot, the game ball enters the time saving entrance 501. It will be in the same state as it was.

In the process of S4012, it is determined whether or not the passage opening flag 203p is turned on (S4012). If the passage opening flag 203p is turned on (S4012: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is opened, and thus the opening is opened. The existing lottery gate 310 is closed (S4013), the passage opening flag 203p is turned off (S4014), and the process proceeds to S4015. On the other hand, if the passage opening flag 203p is not on (that is, if it is off), the processes of S4013 and S4014 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4015.

Next, in the processing of 4015, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered any one of the probability variation entrance openings 502 to 504 based on the detection result of the winning sensors 420a to 420d (S4015). When it is determined that any of the probability variation entrance balls has been detected (S4015: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned on (S4016) in order to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, and further. Then, the lottery execution flag 203n is turned on, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the probability variation entrance ports 502 to 504 (S4015: No), whether the game ball has entered the time reduction entrance port 501 or not. Whether or not it is determined based on the detection result of the winning sensor 420a~420d (S4017), when it is determined that the ball is entered (S4017), after the jackpot is finished, the special symbol is moved to the low probability state, and the time reduction of the normal symbol is achieved. In order to enter the state, the probability variation flag 203e is turned off, the time saving counter is set to 100 (S4018), the lottery execution flag 203n is turned on, and this processing is ended. In addition, in the processing of S4017, when it is determined that the player has not entered the time saving entrance 501, this processing is terminated and the processing returns to the main processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a small hit setting process (S1034) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this small hitting setting processing (S1034). The small hit setting process is a process of switching the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b during the small hit.

In this small hitting setting process (S1034), first, it is determined whether or not the round start flag 203g is on (S4101), and if it is determined that the round start flag 203g is on (S4101: Yes), the round counter. The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the value of 203g and the small hit type (S4102). As described above, the small hit A and the front route big hit C have the same setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in each round. That is, if the small hit type is the small hit A, whether the value of the round counter 203g is 1 or 2 (that is, whether it is the first round or the second round), the flow path The setting of the switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the front route (see FIG. 66). Similarly, the small hit B and the inner root big hit C have the same setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in each round. That is, if the small hit type is the small hit B, whether the value of the round counter 203g is 1 or 2 (that is, whether it is the first round or the second round), the flow path The setting of the switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the inner route (see FIG. 66).

After setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b by the process of S4101, the lottery gate 310 is closed to prevent the game ball from entering the guide passage 323 (S4103), and the round start flag 203l is turned off. Then (S4104), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4101, when it is determined that the round start flag 203l is off, the processes of S4102 to S4104 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. A lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 and a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are provided at different positions, and a game ball is provided to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a until the result of the lottery device 300 is determined. If the game ball cannot be entered, if the game ball does not enter the lottery gate 310 well, the game ball will be consumed, and the player may feel that the game ball has been lost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot game is started, by only hitting a game ball aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, an opportunity for the lottery by the lottery device 300 can be obtained while acquiring the exit ball. You can Therefore, a lot of game balls are not consumed in order to perform the lottery by the lottery device 300, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery device 300 is also configured to perform lottery during the jackpot game, and the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b are switched according to the round, and the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b are switched. Since the pattern is different according to the jackpot type, it is difficult for the player to grasp the round in which the lottery is performed by the lottery device 300.

Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the jackpot game while carefully checking the state of the lottery device 300, so that the jackpot game becomes a monotonous work merely to obtain a ball. Can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the opening of the lottery gate 310 (opening of the guide passage 321) are performed with almost no time lag. Further, the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the closing of the lottery gate 310 are similarly performed with almost no time lag. On the other hand, the opening/closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a may be shifted from the start timing of the round. In addition, the opening/closing timing of the guide passage 321 may be shifted from the opening/closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

This timing difference between opening and closing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening and closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the timing of opening and closing the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) in one round of the jackpot game. .. In FIG. 73(a) and FIG. 73(b), the chart described as "large opening mouth" shows the opening/closing state of the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a, and is referred to as "guidance passage". The chart shown shows the open/close state of the guide passage 321 (open/close state of the lottery gate 310). Further, in each chart, “open” indicates an open state, and “closed” indicates a closed state.

In FIG. 73(a), the jackpot type is any of the front route jackpots A to C, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is the front route state, and the jackpot type is the back. One of the route jackpots A to C, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is the state of the inner route (that is, the state where the game ball can enter the guide passage 321). It is a timing chart showing the timing of opening and closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the timing of opening and closing of the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) in the case of a round.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), there is a time lag (for example, 3 seconds) from the start timing of the round until the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened. Then, there is a time lag (for example, 2 seconds) from the opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a to the opening of the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310). As a result, the game balls can be inserted into the guide passage 321 after the settings of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are reliably switched, so that the game balls are distributed in the traveling direction during the switching of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. It is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the portion 330 and advancing along the route opposite to the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b.

Further, there is a time lag (for example, 2 seconds) from the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a to the closing of the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310). As a result, the game ball that entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a just before the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is also entered into the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310). Therefore, the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is closed before the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a reaches the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

In FIG. 73(b), the jackpot type is one of the front route jackpots A to C, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are in the back route state, and the jackpot type is the back side. It is one of the route jackpots A to C, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is the state of the front route (that is, the game ball cannot enter the guiding passage 321). It is a timing chart showing the timing of opening and closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the case of a round) and the timing of opening and closing the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310).

As shown in FIG. 73(b), the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened for a certain time (for example, 2 seconds) before the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, and the specific winning opening (large). The opening 65a is configured to be opened at the timing when the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is closed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310). In addition, as described above, the player is able to recognize how the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Even if it is a round in which the lottery is not held, it is possible to give an expectation that the lottery may be held in this round.

In addition, depending on whether or not it is a round in which the game ball can be entered into the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310), the timing at which the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened is determined by a specific winning opening (large). Before or after the opening 65a is opened, the timing at which the guide passage 321 (the lottery gate 310) is opened in all rounds is set before the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened. You can

Then, in the round that allows the game ball to enter the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310), the flow path is switched to allow the game ball to enter after the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is completely completed. The valves 331a and 331b may be set simultaneously with the start of a new round.

With this configuration, even if the opening timing of the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is confirmed, whether or not it is a round that allows the game ball to enter the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) Since it is not possible to determine whether or not this round is a round for performing a lottery for transitioning to a high probability state of special symbols, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for a longer period of time. You can

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and among the gaming balls entered into the lottery gate 310, one gaming ball that can proceed to the guide passage 322 is 1 The passage closing valve 324 was provided so as to be restricted to the ball. Then, with respect to the game ball whose progress to the guide passage 322 is restricted by the passage closing valve 324, it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the lottery device 300 through the ball discharge passage 323.

On the other hand, in this modification, all the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 can proceed to the guide passage 322. That is, the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are not provided, and all the game balls that enter the lottery gate 310 can reach the distribution rotor 341.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, based on the entrance (any one of the time saving entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504) into which the game ball first entered after the lottery gate 310 was opened, After the jackpot is finished, it is configured to determine whether the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol is determined.

With this configuration, the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 can be omitted, so that the lottery device 300 can be made compact. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the lottery device 300 provided therein can be increased.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 15, the operation of the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened will be described.

As described above, in this modified example, since the ball discharging passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are not provided, the ball is inserted into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the lottery gate 310 is opened. All the game balls that entered the ball reach the traveling direction distribution unit 330. As described above, in the traveling direction distribution unit 330, the route along which the game ball travels is determined according to the jackpot type. In the case of the front route jackpot A to C, the flow path switching valve 331a of the traveling direction distribution unit 330 is determined. , 331b is the state shown in FIG. 9B (the state of the front route). Therefore, the game ball flows down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341. On the other hand, in the case of the deep route jackpots A to C, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the traveling direction distribution unit 330 becomes the state shown in FIG. 9A (state of the deep route). Therefore, the game ball will flow down to the inner side of the distribution rotor 341.

First, the state of the inner route and the state in which the sorting rotary body 341 is swung to the right will be described with reference to FIG. In the state of the inner route and the state in which the distribution rotary body 341 is swung to the right, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotary body advances in the guide passage 408a (FIG. 12A). As described above, the game ball that has proceeded through the guide passage 408a (FIG. 12(b)) falls as it is without swinging the sorting rotor 341 and enters the time saving ball entrance 501 (FIG. 12(c)). ). In other words, the game entry ball that entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is the entry hole into which the game ball first enters is the time saving entry hole 501. As a result, after the jackpot, the special symbol shifts to a low-probability state for a predetermined number of times of variation (for example, the number of times of variation is 100 times), which is a time saving state of a normal symbol.

Further, in the same round of the big hit, the game balls that have reached the allocating rotary body 341 subsequently proceed in the guide passage 408a in the same manner, so that all the game balls do not swing the allocating rotary body 341 and enter the ball entrance 501. Enter into. Therefore, when the rear route is in the state at the start of the round and the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the right, the jackpot is the same as when the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the time of the end, the allocating rotary body 341 is in a state of being swayed to the right, and shifts to a low probability state of the special symbol and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100 times) It becomes a time saving state.

Further, the state of the front route and the state in which the sorting rotary body 341 is swung to the right will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. In the state of the front route, and in the state where the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the right, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotor advances in the guide passage 408b. As described above, the game ball that has proceeded through the guide passage 408b is prevented from proceeding by the ball stopper 403a (FIG. 13(a)). After that, based on the weight of the game ball being applied to the ball stopper 403a, the distribution rotating body 341 is rotated until it is in a state of being shaken to the left side (FIG. 13B), and the distribution rotating body 341 is rotated. After the operation is completed, the game ball falls and enters the probability variation ball entrance 502. In other words, the game entrance that entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is the first entrance into which the game ball is the probability variation entrance 502. As a result, after the jackpot is over, it shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the same round of the big hit, the game balls that have reached the allocating rotary body 341 thereafter proceed in the guide passage 408d due to the direction of the allocating rotary body 341 changing to the left (FIG. 15). Then, as described above, the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408d (FIG. 15(a)) enters the certainty variation ball inlet 504 without swinging the distribution rotor 341 (FIG. 15(c)). Therefore, the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 enters the certainty variation ball entrance 504 without swinging the distribution rotor 341, except for the game ball that first reached the distribution rotor 341.

Therefore, when the front route is in effect at the start of the round and the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the right, as in the case where the ball discharging passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided, a big hit. At the time of the end, the allocating rotating body 341 is in a state of oscillating to the left, and the state shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol.

Further, the state of the inner route and the state in which the sorting rotary body 341 is swung to the left side will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 14. In the state of the inner route and in the state where the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotor advances in the guide passage 408c. As described above, the game ball that has advanced through the guide passage 408c is blocked by the ball stopper 405a (FIG. 14(a)). After that, based on the weight of the game ball being applied to the ball stopper 405a, the distribution rotating body 341 is rotated until the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right (FIG. 14B), and the distribution rotating body 341 rotates. After the operation is completed, the game ball falls and enters the probability variation ball entrance 503. That is, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is the probability changing entrance 503, which is the first entrance into which the game ball enters. As a result, after the jackpot is over, it shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the same round of the big hit, the game balls that have reached the allocating rotary body 341 thereafter proceed in the guide passage 408a due to the change of the direction of the allocating rotary body 341 to the right (FIG. 12). Then, as described above, the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408a (FIG. 12(a)) enters the time saving ball entrance 501 without swinging the distribution rotor 341 (FIG. 12(c)). Therefore, the game balls that enter the lottery gate 310 enter the time saving ball entrance 501 without rocking the distribution rotor 341, except for the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotor 341. As described above, since the state after the jackpot is finished is set based on the type of the ball entrance that first entered the ball, the game balls other than the game ball that first reached the distribution rotor 341 are the time saving ball entrances. No matter how many balls you enter into 501, the setting of the state after the jackpot is not overwritten.

Therefore, when the rear route is in the state at the start of the round and the sorting rotary body 341 is swung to the left side, as in the case where the ball discharging passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided, a big hit. At the time of the end, the allocating rotary body 341 is in a state of oscillating to the right, and the state shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol.

Next, the state of the front route and the state in which the sorting rotary body 341 swings to the left will be described with reference to FIG. In the state of the front route, and in the state where the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotor advances in the guide passage 408d (FIG. 15(a)). As described above, the game ball that has proceeded through the guide passage 408d (FIG. 15(b)) falls as it is without swinging the sorting rotary member 341, and enters the positive variation ball inlet 5034 (FIG. 15(c)). ). In other words, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is the first entrance into which the game ball enters the probability variation entrance 504. As a result, after the jackpot is over, it shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol.

Also, in the same round of jackpot, the game balls that have reached the distribution rotor 341 subsequently proceed in the guide passage 408d in the same manner, so that all the game balls do not swing the distribution rotor 341 and are accurately changed. Enter the mouth 504. Therefore, when the front route is in effect at the start of the round and the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left side, as in the case where the ball discharging passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided, a big hit. At the time of the end, the allocating rotating body 341 is in a state of oscillating to the left, and the state shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol.

As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the entrance (either the time saving entrance 501 or the probability variation entrances 502 to 504) in which the game ball first enters after the lottery gate 310 is opened. Even if a plurality of game balls proceed to the allocating rotary member 341, the lottery is performed by deciding whether to make the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot. The lottery result by the device 300 can be the same as that of the other embodiments. Further, the arrangement of the distribution rotary body 341 at the end of the big hit can be the same as that of the other embodiments.

As a result, the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 can be omitted, and the lottery device 300 can be made compact, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a can be increased.

In the third embodiment and the modified example of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the opening pattern of the lottery gate 310 and the switching pattern of the flow path. And were changed according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the lottery device 300 may be provided outside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the drawing device 300 and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a may be used as the specific winning openings. In this case, the lottery device 300 is defined as the first specific winning opening and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is defined as the second specific winning opening, and the lottery gate 310 is opened in the first hit type selection table 202b. In a round in which a game ball can be entered into the guide passage 321, the first specific winning opening (lottery device 300) is opened and the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is closed. On the other hand, in the first hit type selection table 202b, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is closed to limit the game balls to the guide passage 321, the first specific winning opening (lottery device 300) is closed and the second specific winning opening. The (specific winning port 65a) may be opened.

In the third embodiment and the modification of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside one specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, but the specific winning opening (large opening) is 2 One is provided (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a1, 65a2), and the game ball that has won the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a1 is configured to flow down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341, and the specific winning The game ball that has won the mouth (large opening) 65a2 may be configured to flow down to the inner side of the allocating rotary member 341. Then, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is defined to be opened in the first winning type selection table 202b, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a1 is opened and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a2 is closed. To do. On the other hand, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is specified to be closed in the first winning type selection table 202b, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a1 is closed and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a2 is opened. do it. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the lottery gate 310 and the traveling direction distribution unit 330, so that the lottery device 300 can be made compact.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. In the above-described first embodiment, when it is detected that the player has entered the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504, the voice lamp control device 113 shifts to the loop state, which is an advantageous state for the player. Is configured to be transmitted (loop state command). Then, the voice lamp controller 113 executes the variation pattern in a special manner for the loop state based on receiving the loop state command, and can suggest to the player that the present state is advantageous. Was configured as.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern effect, the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit is executed in a mode according to the state of the lottery device 300 or the like. It is configured to be possible.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the jackpot stop symbol is stopped, before the jackpot game is started, the lottery device 300 performs a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a high probability state of the special symbol. Although configured, in the present embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened at the start of the eighth round, which is the final round, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. Is configured.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration, in the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b and the jackpot battle selection table 222c are stored in the ROM 222. And a state flag 223f is provided in the RAM 223. Moreover, a part of the processing included in the command determination processing (FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 74, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b and a jackpot battle selection table 222c in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment. Further, the RAM 223 included in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a status flag 223f in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b is used to determine the detailed aspect of the variation pattern based on the aspect of the rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command similarly to the variation pattern table 222a. A plurality of detailed variation pattern aspects that can be selected are defined for each rough aspect of the variation pattern notified by the command. The difference between the jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b and the variation pattern table 222a is that the jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b defines a production mode of a variation pattern effect in which the winning of the jackpot is notified.

The jackpot battle selection table 222c defines the form of the display effect performed in the third symbol display measure 81 during the jackpot, and makes the selectable effect mode different according to the state of the lottery device 300 and the like. ..

The state flag 223f is a flag that indicates which one of the states A to F defined in a state setting table (not shown) that is currently present, and selects a variation pattern mode from the jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b. This flag is taken into consideration when performing (see S2713 of FIG. 80) or when selecting a performance mode during jackpot from the jackpot selection table 222c (see S4206 of FIG. 81).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78, of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a big hit occurs in the present embodiment, and the display effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit. The presentation mode will be described.

FIG. 75 is a state setting table showing a flow of effects of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. This state setting table is set in the ROM 222. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are three states, state A, state C, and state E, when the third pattern display device 81 executes the variation pattern effect that is a big hit, and each state. Then, the presentation mode of the selected variation pattern presentation is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are three states of state B, state D, and state F as states when the display effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, In each state, the presentation mode of the selected display presentation is different.

In the states A to F, the production with a storyline is executed, and it is suggested whether or not it is a loop state or whether to shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol according to the result of the produced production. Is configured. Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described in order from the state A.

State A indicates a normal state (that is, a low-probability state of a special symbol), and whether the jackpot type of the jackpot won while staying in the state A is jackpot A or jackpot B A common effect is executed. Specifically, when the big hit is won in the state A, the main character character with a shield and a sword searches for an enemy monster in the variation pattern effect in which the big hit is announced, and the effect is performed until the encounter. .. In this production, you can meet a monster, and the stop symbol that shows a big hit is fixedly displayed at the timing when the battle begins. Further, when the big hit game is started after the stop symbol indicating the big hit is confirmed and displayed, the state is shifted to the state B (see the state A in FIG. 75).

In the out-of-range variation effect, an effect in which the hero searches for an enemy, but the enemy is not found (the enemy cannot be met) is executed. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether it is a big hit or a miss at the time when the effect of searching for the enemy is started, and thus it is possible to let the player pay attention to the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 until the end. ..

FIG. 76(a) shows the display contents when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed in the effect performed in the state A. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the characters "Battle start!!" are displayed above the scene in which the hero and the enemy are glaring at each other, and the player can say that the battle between the hero and the enemy is about to begin. Will be notified. Further, on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, a state in which three "8" symbols are arranged is displayed. As described above, the stop symbol at the time of a big hit is not limited to "8".

An HP gauge showing the hit points of each character is displayed below the main character and the enemy. The HP gauge is a gauge that represents the vitality of each character. In the battle between the hero and the enemy, the gauge decreases when the opponent attacks and the knockout state occurs when the gauge becomes 0. Although details will be described later, when the HP gauge of the protagonist is exhausted by the enemy's attack, it suggests to the player that the special symbol will shift to a low probability state after the jackpot, and conversely by the protagonist's attack. When the enemy's HP gauge becomes 0, it is meant to the player to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over.

State B is a state in which a stop symbol indicating a big hit is definitely displayed in the state A, and a big hit game is started. In this state B, in the eighth round, which is the final round of the jackpot, the battle production between the hero and the enemy is settled, and whether to move to a high probability state of special symbols or a low probability state of special symbols It is suggested.

Specifically, if the main character attacks the enemy and sets the enemy's HP gauge to 0, and is able to destroy the enemy, it is suggested that the special symbol will shift to a high probability state after the jackpot ends. .. On the other hand, if the hero is attacked by the enemy and the HP gauge of the hero is 0, it is suggested that the special symbol shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot. Further, in the state B, when the special symbol has a high probability state, the state moves to the state C. However, when the special symbol has a low probability state, the state shifts to the state A. That is, unless the jackpot A is won and the special symbol high probability state is entered, the state A and the state B are repeated (see state B in FIG. 75).

State C is a state in which the main character wins the enemy in state B, and the state shifts after the jackpot game in which the winning effect is performed is finished, and the same effect as state A is executed. The difference with state A is that if you win the big jackpot in state A, you will be transferred to state B after the symbol showing the big jackpot is confirmed and displayed, whereas if you win the big jackpot in state C, you will get the big jackpot. The difference is that after the symbol shown is confirmed and displayed, the state shifts to state D (see state C in FIG. 75).

State D is a state in which a stop symbol showing a big hit in the state C is confirmed and displayed, and a big hit game is started. Even in this state D, if the protagonist can make the enemy's hit points 0 in the eighth round, which is the final round of the big hit, as in the case of state B, it is suggested to shift to the high probability state of special symbols after the big hit ends. To be done.

On the other hand, unlike the state B, in the state C, even if the main character is attacked by the enemy, the HP gauge does not become 0 completely, and the state becomes a pinch. State D is a state that transitions only when the state transitions to a high probability state of special symbols in state B, but when transitioning to a high probability state of special symbols in state B, the player enters the lottery device 300. This is a case where the game ball enters the certainty variation ball entrance 501 after rotating the state of the allocating rotary body 341 to the leftward arrangement (see FIG. 13 ). Therefore, after the jackpot game being performed in the state D, it has been confirmed that the special symbol will shift to the high-probability state regardless of the jackpot type, suggesting that the special symbol will shift to the low-probability state. Yes, there is no need to perform an effect in which the HP character of the protagonist becomes 0.

However, when the jackpot B is won in a state where the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left, the game balls that enter the lottery device 300 are distributed to the guide passage 408c of the distribution rotor 341, and the distribution rotor 341 After turning the state to the right arrangement, it enters the probability variation entrance 503 (see FIG. 14), so if you win the big hit B again next time, move to the low probability state of the special symbol. There is a possibility that it will end up.

Therefore, in the state D, if the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the main character attacks from the enemy in the display effect in order to suggest that the jackpot may shift to the low probability state of the special symbol after the next jackpot. It is configured to execute an effect that causes a pinch upon receipt. Further, after the effect that causes a pinch is executed and the jackpot is finished, the state shifts to state E (see state D in FIG. 75).

FIG.76(b) shows the effect performed in the final round (8th round) of the jackpot B when the jackpot B is won in the state C and the player shifts to the state D. As shown in FIG. 76(b), the main character is attacked by the enemy's lunge, and the HP is greatly reduced. By bringing the main character into a pinch state by the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible for the player to be in a state that is disadvantageous to the player (a state in which the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the right). It can be easily recognized.

In FIG. 76(b), after being attacked by the enemy's rush, the hero is blown away by the impact of the rush, and both the hero and the enemy lose sight of each other. Therefore, although the details will be described later, in the state E where the game is transferred after the jackpot game is over, an effect in which the hero searches for an enemy is performed again.

In addition, in the state D, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the game balls that have entered the lottery device 300 flow down the guide passage 408d, so that the arrangement of the sorting rotary body 341 is leftly swung. Since there is none (see FIG. 15 ), the state C is entered again. That is, unless the jackpot B is won and the special symbol low probability state is entered, state C and state D are repeated (see state D in FIG. 75).

The state E is a state in which the jackpot B is won in the state C, and the state changes to the state in which the main character is in a state of being pinched by being attacked by the enemy in the state D. Performs an effect in which the player searches for the enemy and the jackpot is confirmed if the enemy can be met. On the other hand, in the state E, a preliminary effect that is not performed in the state A or the state C is performed while the enemy is being searched for or when the enemy is encountered.

Specifically, when the protagonist discovers a medicinal herb during the search for an enemy (see FIG. 77(a)) or encounters an enemy, a dog character who is a companion to the protagonist is directed to join the protagonist. (See FIG. 77(b)). It can be suggested that the discovery of the medicinal herb may recover the damage caused by the attack received from the enemy in the state D, and the fact that if the allies join together, the opposing force against the enemy can be suggested.

These effects are easily performed if the jackpot won in state E is a jackpot A, and difficult to be performed if the jackpot won is a jackpot B (see state E of FIG. 75). By performing such an effect, the player's expectation for destroying the enemy can be increased. When the jackpot is won in the state E, the symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, and then the state is shifted to the state F (see the state E in FIG. 75).

State F is a state in which a stop symbol indicating a big hit in the state E is definitely displayed and the big hit game is started. Even in this state F, as in the case of state B and state D, if the enemy's HP gauge is set to 0 by attacking the enemy, it is suggested to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot. However, in the state F, the HP gauge may be reduced, or fellow characters may be joined, so the mode is different from the states B and D.

Specifically, when transitioning to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot, the effect of destroying the enemy in a display mode as shown in FIG. 78(a) is executed, and the low probability of the special symbol after the jackpot. When transitioning to the state, an effect of defeating the enemy is executed in a display mode as shown in FIG. 78(b). If the player wins the enemy, the state shifts to state C after the jackpot, and if the player loses the enemy, the state shifts to state A after the jackpot ends.

In addition, when the enemy is won in the state F, the HP gauge is restored after the victory and the HP is restored to the perfect state. As a result, the HP is always in perfect condition in the state C, so it is possible to confirm whether or not the present state is advantageous (that is, the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the left) only by confirming the HP of the hero. can do.

<Regarding Control Processing in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. This command determination process (S1312) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process of determining the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

Of the command determination processing of this voice lamp control device 113, in each processing of S1401, S1403 to S1410, and S1419, S1401 of the command determination processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as the processes of S1403 to S1410 and S1419 are executed. Then, in the command determination processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, when the processing in S1401 is completed, instead of the variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment, variation pattern selection processing 2 (S1421). To execute. The variation pattern selection process 2 is a process for selecting a variation pattern effect corresponding to each of the above-described state A, state C, and state E.

If the determination result in the process of S1408 is No, it is determined whether or not a command regarding the jackpot game has been received (S1422). The command related to the jackpot game includes all commands related to the jackpot, such as a round number command, an opening command, and an interval command.

In the process of S1422, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot game is received (S1422: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S1423), and this process is ended. The big hit production process (S1423) is a process for setting a big big display effect in the above-described state B, state D, and state F. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot game has not been received (S1422: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1419), and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a variation pattern selection process 2 (S1421) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process 2.

In the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1421), the process of S2701 is the same as the process of S2701 of the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Then, in the fluctuation pattern selection processing 2 in the fourth embodiment, when the processing of S2701 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 indicates a jackpot fluctuation pattern. (S2711).

In the process of S2711, when it is determined that the jackpot variation pattern is shown (S2711: Yes), the state flag 223f is set from the state setting table (FIG. 75) and the jackpot type (S2712), Next, based on the setting content of the state flag 223f, a variation pattern for jackpot is selected (S2713), and this processing ends. For example, when the state flag 223f indicates the state E and the jackpot type is the jackpot A, an effect of encountering an enemy is performed along with an effect of acquiring a medicinal herb and an effect of a friend coming to assist.

In the processing of S2711, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the big hit is not shown (that is, the deviation pattern of deviation), the deviation pattern for deviation is extracted from the received command (S2714), and this processing ends. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the jackpot effect process (S1423) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this jackpot effect processing.

In the big hit production process (S1423), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received (S4201), and when it is determined that the opening command is received (S4201: Yes), the state setting table (FIG. 75), A state flag is set based on the jackpot type (S4202). For example, when the state flag 223f indicates the state C and the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the state flag is updated to the state D (see state D in FIG. 75).

Then, based on the state of the state flag 223f that has been set, a jackpot effect pattern is set (S4203), and this processing ends. For example, when the state flag 223f is set to indicate the state D and the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the main character is attacked by the enemy and a pinch effect is set as the jackpot effect.

In the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received, it is determined whether or not the player has entered an entrance different from the setting of the state flag 223f (S4204). For example, when the setting of the state flag 223f indicates the state B and the big hit type is the big hit B, the game ball is supposed to enter the hour shortening ball entrance 501, but with respect to the pachinko machine 10. If the player has entered any of the probability variation entrance ports 502 to 504 due to vibration or the like, the jackpot ends despite the fact that the production of defeating the hero has been decided. After that, the special symbol will be changed to a high probability state, which may give a player a feeling of strangeness.

Therefore, in the processing of S4204, when it is determined that the player has entered a different entrance from the setting of the state flag 223f (S4204: Yes), the player is attacked by the enemy and falls according to the type of the different entrance. The protagonist sets up the final power to squeeze and stand up, attacking the enemy and destroying it, or set the production where the defeated enemy gets up and attacks the main character and the protagonist loses in reverse. After that (S4205), this processing ends.

By performing the processing of S4205, it is possible to match the gaming state after the jackpot is over with the result of the display effect during the jackpot, so that the gaming state after the jackpot is over and the result of the display effect during the jackpot. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the discrepancy.

In the processing of S4204, when it is determined that the player has not entered the entrance different from the setting of the status flag 223f (that is, entered the entrance as set by the status flag 223f) (S4204: No). , A mode of the display effect during the big hit is set based on the big hit effect pattern set in the process of S4203 (S4206), and the present process is ended.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is configured to execute a series of effects with a storyline based on the state of the distribution rotor 341 of the lottery device 300, the type of jackpot that was won, and the like. ing. Further, these series of effects are configured to be executed in a variation pattern effect in which a jackpot stop symbol is displayed and a display effect during a jackpot game that is executed after the variation pattern effect.

As a result, the game ball that entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 entered any of the entrances (the time saving entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504). Even if you overlook this, by checking the result of the display effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the special symbol shifts to a high-probability state after the jackpot. be able to.

Also in the present embodiment, the distribution rotor 341 of the lottery device 300 is configured to be visible to the player, and the player confirms the distribution rotor 341 to confirm the distribution rotor 341, which is advantageous for the player (ie, It is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the distribution rotary body 341 is in the state of being swung to the left). However, when a player unfamiliar with the game plays the game, the player may sometimes play the game without knowing what is different between the state in which the sorting rotary body 341 is swung to the right and the state in which the sorting rotary body 341 is swung to the left.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by the display effect during the jackpot game, it is possible not only to suggest whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, but in the high probability state of the special symbol, the HP of the hero is It is configured so that whether the present state is advantageous or not can be recognized depending on whether the state is sufficient and the pinch state in which the HP is decreasing. Therefore, even a player unfamiliar with the game can easily recognize whether or not the current state is advantageous.

In the present embodiment, only two types of HP gauges of the main character, that is, the pinch state and the perfect state, are provided, but other states may be provided. For example, in addition to the perfect state and the pinch state, a state in which the HP gauge is reduced by about 20%, a state in which the HP gauge is reduced by half, and a state in which the HP gauge is reduced by about 70% are added. Is also good. In this case, the state of the main character's HP gauge can be stored in the RAM 223, and while the high probability state of the special symbol continues, the HP gauge is held and the special symbol is held. It may be configured to be reset when the low probability state of 1. As a result, the display effect can be changed in a natural flow including the HP gauge, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the present embodiment, the lottery device 300 is configured to perform the lottery in the eighth round, but it may be configured to perform the lottery in another round. In addition, after the stop symbol indicating the big hit is confirmed and displayed, the lottery may be performed before the start of the big hit game.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and by changing the directions of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b according to the jackpot types, the route through which the game ball passes is set to the front route or the back route. Had decided. On the other hand, the route through which the game balls entering the lottery device 300 pass may be randomly selected to be the front route or the back route. That is, the jackpot type may be configured so as not to affect the flow path of the game balls flowing down in the lottery device 300. As a configuration for randomly allocating the flow paths of the game balls, for example, a known clune means (two-hole clune) having two through holes may be provided instead of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. .. Then, when the game ball that has reached the two-hole clune passes through one of the two through-holes of the two-hole clune, it flows down to the front side of the sorting rotary body 341 and the other through-hole. When passing, it may be configured so as to flow down to the inner side of the distribution rotary body 341. With such a configuration, whether the game ball flows down to the front side or the back side of the distribution rotating body 341 until the game ball actually passes through one of the through holes of the two-hole clune. It is possible to make it indistinguishable. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player for a long time with the expectation that the game ball will pass through the route on the front side, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, the setting of the sorting rotary body 341 is reset to a state of being swung to the right (a state of facing up). Although it was configured as described above, without changing the arrangement of the allocating rotary body 341, the respective entrances (the time saving entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504) and the state of transition after the jackpot is over. The correspondence may be changed. That is, based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, when it is determined that the state of the sorting rotary body 341 is the state of being swung to the left (the state of facing up), the game ball enters the time saving ball entrance 501. It changes to the setting which shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, and changes to the setting which shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot when the game ball enters the probability variation entrance ball 504. With this, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up by turning on the power, the initial setting can be performed only by changing the setting of the entrance port by software, and therefore, it is necessary to return the distribution rotating body 341 to the initial position. The dynamic motor 264 can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the allocating rotary member 341 is provided in the rectangular floor portion 401, the pair of rectangular passage walls 402, and the guide passages 408b and 408c, from the floor portion 401 below the shaft 406 to the floor portion 401. On the other hand, it is composed of a pair of inclined portions 403b and 405b extending obliquely and ball stoppers 403a and 405a provided at the ends of the inclined portions 403b and 405b opposite to the floor portion 401. However, the distribution rotating body 341 is not limited to this shape. For example, a windmill-like shape may be used.

In the above-described embodiment, the guide passage 408a of the distributing rotary member 341 and the guide passage 408d are extended to the downstream side of the shaft 406, and the game ball that flows down the guide passage 408a or the guide passage 408d has the shaft 406. Even if it passed, it was configured to flow down on the floor portion 401 (see FIGS. 12B and 15B). On the other hand, of the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d, the passage downstream of the shaft 406 may be eliminated. Instead of deleting the passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406 of the distributing rotary body 341, a passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406 may be provided on the cover portion 423 side. That is, the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d are provided on the downstream side of the shaft 406 on the right rear side of the cover portion 423 in front view and on the left front side of the cover portion 423 in front view. When the distribution rotor 341 is swung to the right around the shaft 406, the guide passage 408a of the distribution rotor 341 and the passage on the right rear side of the cover portion 423 in front view are engaged with each other, and thus, in the above-described embodiment. It is configured to form a guide passage similar to the guide passage 408a. When the distribution rotor 341 swings to the left around the shaft 406, the guide passage 408d of the distribution rotor 341 and the passage on the left front side of the cover portion 423 in front view are engaged with each other to guide the guide according to the above embodiment. A guide passage similar to the passage 408d is formed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load due to the weight of the game ball from being applied to the passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408a or the guide passage 408d, it is sorted. It is possible to reliably prevent the rotating body 341 from rotating due to the weight of the game ball and swinging to the opposite side.

In the fourth embodiment, as a mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, an effect in which the hero and the enemy fight is configured to be executed, and the hero wins the enemy in the display effect during the jackpot game. By doing this, it was suggested that the transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of this big jackpot, and the transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the next jackpot. On the other hand, it is also possible to prepare a production in which it becomes clear that the hero wins without checking the result of the battle with the enemy to the end. For example, the palm-sized enemies may appear with a certain probability (for example, 10%) when shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol this time and after the next big hit. By the appearance of an enemy whose size is significantly smaller than that of a normal enemy, the player can be confident that the hero will win when the enemy appears. In addition, during the fluctuating effect that is a big hit in state A, state C, and state E, the hero does not encounter an enemy with a certain probability (for example, 10% when winning big jackpot A), and discovers a treasure box containing treasure It may be configured such that the effect is performed. In the production during the jackpot game after the production of finding the treasure, the production of bringing the treasure back to the family may be performed. By performing the production to discover the treasure, it is possible to convince the player that before the jackpot game starts, this time, and after the next jackpot, the special symbol will shift to a high probability state. .. In this way, by giving multiple variations to the performance, it is possible to have not only the expectation that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuous, but also the expectation that an unusual production will be performed, It is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of the player's game.

Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the jackpot expected value until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

A specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused is equipped with a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols, and is not provided with a handle for ball launch. There are things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, for example due to the operation of the stop switch, or the predetermined amount. By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of medals and balls.

A pachinko machine in which some or all of the above-described respective embodiments are combined may be used.

Below, in addition to the pachinko machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Structure of an accessory for confirming two probable changes)
A ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, a first area and a second area in which a game ball entering the ball entrance can enter, and either one of the first area and the second area And a distribution means for allocating the game balls that have entered the entry ball opening, and based on the fact that the game balls have entered the first area, the player has a greater chance than if the game balls entered the second area. In a gaming machine that shifts to a special game state that is advantageous to, a first state in which the distribution means can distribute game balls to the first area, and a first area or a second area. Variable means capable of changing the game ball into a second state in which the game ball can be distributed, and a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can pass when in the first state. And, in the case of the second state, it is provided with a third flow path and a fourth flow path through which the game ball can pass, and the variable means allows the game ball to pass through the second flow path. In this case, the distribution means is changed from the first state to the second state, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, the distribution is performed from the second state to the first state. A game machine A1 characterized in that the means is variable.

According to the gaming machine A1, the variable means allows the allocating means to allocate the game balls to the first area, and the first state and the game balls to the first area or the second area. The state is changed to the second state. Then, in the first state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path, and in the second state, the game ball can pass through the third flow path and the fourth flow path. .. Here, when the game ball passes through the second flow path, the state of the sorting means is changed from the first state to the second state by the changing means, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, The state of the sorting means is changed from the second state to the first state by the changing means. Thus, if the distribution means is changed to the first state, it is possible for the player to allocate the game balls to the first area and shift to the special game state in the next distribution performed by the distribution means. It can be recognized. Therefore, from the time when the distribution means is changed to the first state until the time when the distribution means performs the distribution next time, the player feels reassured and satisfied with the transition to the special game state. There is an effect that the player can play the game while holding him.

In the gaming machine A1, the third flow path allows the passed game balls to enter the first area, and the fourth flow path allows the passed game balls to enter the second area. A gaming machine A2 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball that has passed through the third flow path enters the first area, and the game ball that has passed through the fourth flow path enters the second area, so if the game ball passes through the third flow path. , The game ball enters the first area and shifts to the special game state, and the state of the sorting means changes to the first state. Therefore, it is possible to continuously shift to a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and to the player who recognizes that the game ball has shifted to the special game state based on the passage of the third flow path. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to give a sense of security and satisfaction to the continuation of the special game state.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the varying means is capable of varying the state of the allocating means based on the weight of a game ball passing through the gaming machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the state of the sorting means is changed by the changing means on the basis of the weight of the game ball passing therethrough, the state of the distributing means can be changed by a natural operation by the changing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution means from being changed at an unnatural timing, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the gaming machine or the hall.

In the gaming machines A1 to A3, the variable means is provided with a variable suppressing means for suppressing the state of the sorting means from changing in a state in which a game ball is not passing through.

According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, the switching of the state of the sorting means in the state where the game ball is not passing is suppressed by the variable suppressing means, so that the sorting means is the first at a timing different from the timing when the sorting means is changed by the varying means. It is possible to prevent the player from switching from the state to the second state, damaging the player, and making the player feel distrust of the game machine and the hall.

<Characteristic B group> (Display effect according to the state of the flow path and the structure for the twice loop)
Based on the satisfaction of the lottery conditions, a win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination, a display means for displaying the identification information indicating the win/no determination result by the win/loss determination means, and the presentation of the identification information displayed on the display means. A privilege mode executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player after the effect mode specifying means for specifying a mode and the identification information indicating the predetermined hit/miss judgment result are displayed, and the privilege is executed by the privilege game executing means. After the game is executed, a game state specifying means for specifying which one of the first game state and the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is set as the executed game state. And a continuation setting means for setting the game state identification means to a continuation state in which the second game state is easily identified a plurality of times continuously, and the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means. If the continuation state has been set, the continuation state is ended, and the continuation setting means sets the continuation state to the fall state in which the first game state is easily identified by the game state identification means. And a production mode changing means for changing the production mode specified by the production mode specifying means based on whether the state is set or the fall state is set by the fall state setting means. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine B1, the continuation setting means sets the game state identification means to the continuation state in which it is easy to identify the second game state a plurality of times. Then, when the game state specifying means is set to the continuous state, the falling state setting means ends the continuous state, and the first game state is set to the falling state which is a state that is easily specified. Here, the effect mode changing unit changes the effect mode specified by the effect mode specifying unit based on whether the continuation setting unit sets the continuous state or the falling state setting unit sets the falling state. It With this, the player can determine whether or not the present state is the continuous state only by confirming the effect state displayed on the display means, and thus the aspect indicating the continuous state is displayed as the effect mode. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the second game state is likely to be specified multiple times in a row.

In the gaming machine B1, after the identification information indicating the predetermined win/no judgment result is displayed, and before the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means is finished, the game state is specified by the game state specifying means. The suggestion display control means for controlling the display means to display the suggestive effect suggesting the state is provided, and the suggestive display control means suggests that the specific result by the game state identifying means is the second game state. When the display effect is controlled to be displayed on the display means, the display is performed based on whether the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means or the fall state is set by the fall state setting means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by specifying a suggestive effect to be made.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when controlling to display the display effect indicating that the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second game state on the display means, the suggestion display control means identifies the predetermined result of the hit/miss judgment. After the information is displayed, and before the privilege game execution means finishes executing the privilege game, the display means is controlled so as to display a suggestion effect suggesting the state specified by the game state specifying means. Therefore, the suggestion effect is displayed on the display means, which has the effect of giving the player a sense of security that the second game state is likely to be specified multiple times in succession. .. In addition, since it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting that the suggestion effect is displayed on the display means during the bonus game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. is there.

In the gaming machine B2, the continuation setting means sets the continuation state when the identification result by the gaming state identification means is the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second game state, the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means. Therefore, when the continuation state is reached, the second game state is passed. Since it is possible to prevent the state between the continuation state and the first identification by the game state identification means from becoming the first game state, the player continues the first game state. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game before the identification is first performed by the game state identification means.

In the gaming machine B3, the suggestion display control means can suggest that the continuation setting means has set the continuation state in the suggestion effect.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the suggestion effect, the suggestion display control means suggests that the continuation state has been set by the continuation setting means, so that the player can easily recognize that the continuation state has been set. Therefore, by setting the continuous state, it is possible to recognize that the second game state has become easy to be specified a plurality of times in a row, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

<Characteristic C group> (Distribution in two stages during probability variation lottery)
Based on the satisfaction of the lottery conditions, a win/loss determination means for executing a win/loss determination, and based on the result of the win/fail determination by the win/fail determination means being a predetermined result, a privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed. After the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the privilege game executing means, the game state to be executed is a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In the gaming machine having a game state specifying means for specifying which of the states, the game state specifying means is based on a first lottery and a second lottery different from the first lottery. A first game state and a second game state are respectively specified, and as the first lottery, a first specified state in which the first game state is more easily specified than the second game state, First lottery means for selecting which of the second specific states the second gaming state is more likely to be specified than the first specific state, and the second specific state as the second lottery. Even if is set, it has a second lottery means for lottery whether or not to set a special state in which the second game state is more easily specified than the second game state. A gaming machine C1 to play.

According to the gaming machine C1, based on the first lottery and the second lottery different from the first lottery, the game state identifying means identifies the first game state and the second game state, respectively. Then, as the first lottery, a first specific state in which the first gaming state is more easily specified than in the second gaming state, and a second specific state in which the second gaming state is more easily specified than in the first specific state. Which of the specific states is set is selected by the first selection means. Here, even if the second specific state is set as the second lottery, whether or not to set a special state in which the second game state is more easily specified than the second game state is determined by the second lottery means. To be done. As a result, in the one-time game state identification by the game state identification means, two lottery opportunities, that is, a lottery by the first lottery means and a lottery by the second lottery means, are given. It can make you feel that you have more opportunities to receive it. Further, even if the result of the lottery by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, it is expected that the result of the lottery will set the special state by the second lottery means without discouraging the player. Since it is possible to play the game, there is an effect that it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the identification of the state by the game state identification means.

In the gaming machine C1, the second lottery means performs a lottery on whether to set a special state at the next identification by the game state identification means, based on the identification by the game state identification means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, the second lottery means determines whether to set the special state at the time of the next identification by the game state identification means based on the identification by the game state identification means. Thereby, even if the lottery result by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, if the second lottery means that the special state is set, the first lottery means makes the first identification. It is possible to reduce the player's disappointment with respect to the state being drawn by lot, and it is possible to allow the player to play the game while looking forward to the identification in the special state at the time of the next identification by the gaming state identification means. Further, if the result of the lottery by the first lottery means indicates the second specific state and the result of the lottery by the second lottery means indicates the special state, the advantageous state for the player is continued. Since the player can recognize it, there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of security and satisfaction.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the game state specifying means is based on a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the ball entrance, and the privilege game executing means. Based on the first area in which the game state executed after the execution of the privilege game is specified as the first game state and the game ball entering the ball entrance enters the ball, A second area in which a game state executed after execution of the privilege game by the game executing means is specified to be a second game state, the first lottery and the second lottery are directed to the entrance slot. A gaming machine C3, which determines whether to guide the game ball to the first area or the second area by changing the flow-down direction of the entered game ball.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, it is possible to set the game state executed after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means to the first game state, based on the fact that the game ball entering the ball entrance enters the first area. It is specified by specifying means. Then, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the ball entrance enters the second area, it is possible to set the game state executed after the execution of the score game by the privilege game execution means to the second game state. It is specified by specifying means. Here, it is determined by the first lottery and the second lottery whether to guide the game ball to the first area or the second area by changing the flowing direction of the game ball that has entered the ball entrance. As a result, the player can easily determine the result of the lottery by the first lottery and the second lottery simply by confirming the flow-down direction of the game ball.

In the gaming machine C3, the second lottery means randomly draws whether or not to set the special state based on the fact that the game balls are distributed to the first area or the second area. C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3. That is, since the second lottery means determines whether or not to set the special state based on the allocation to the first area or the second area, the timing of the lottery performed by the player by the second lottery means. Has an effect that can be easily recognized.

In the gaming machine C4, a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can pass when the game ball is in the special state, and a third flow path in which the game ball is restricted to pass when the game ball is in the special state The flow path and the fourth flow path are provided, and the second lottery means determines that the special state is set when the game ball passes through the third flow path, and the second flow path. A gaming machine C5, which determines that the special state is to be released when the gaming ball passes through.

According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4. That is, in the special state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path. Then, in the special state, the game ball is restricted from passing through the third passage and the fourth passage. Here, when the game ball passes through the third flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means that the game ball is set to the special state. Further, when the game ball passes through the second flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means to cancel the special state. Thereby, the player can determine that the special state has been set only by confirming that the game ball passes through the third flow path, and thus confirms that the game ball passes through the third flow path. There is an effect that the player who plays the game can play the game in the next specification by the game status specifying means while giving a sense of security and satisfaction to the specification in the special state.

In the gaming machine C5, the third flow path allows the passed game balls to enter the second area, and the fourth flow path allows the passed game balls to enter the first area. A gaming machine C6 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball that has passed through the third flow path enters the second area, and the game ball that has passed through the fourth flow path enters the first area, so that the player passes through the third flow path. By recognizing that, it is possible to recognize that the second game state, which is more advantageous than the first game state, is shifted to, and that the lottery to be performed next by the second lottery means is performed in the special state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player, who has recognized that the game ball has passed through the third flow path, a great sense of satisfaction and a sense of security in the continuous advantageous state.

<Characteristic D group> (Prevents two or more game balls from entering the sorting means)
A ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, a first area and a second area in which a game ball entering the ball entrance can enter, and either one of the first area and the second area Distribution means for allocating the game balls that have entered the entry ball opening, and switching means for switching to a ball entry permission state that allows the game balls to enter the entry opening for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition , A transition means for transitioning to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball enters the second area, based on the game ball entering the first area. Yes, the distribution means can change the game ball into a first state in which the game balls can be distributed to the first region and a second state in which the game balls can be easily distributed to the second region. With a variable means, when one game ball entering the ball entrance reaches the sorting means, the game ball entering the ball entrance after the game ball reaches the sorting means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by comprising limiting means for limiting that at least while in the entry permitted state.

According to the gaming machine D1, the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are distributed to one of the first area and the second area by the distribution means, and the game balls are distributed to the ball entrance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The switching means is allowed to enter the ball for a predetermined period. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first area, the transition means shifts the game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball entered the second area. .. Further, the changing means changes the distribution means between a first state in which the game balls can be distributed to the first area and a second state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second area. Here, when one game ball that has entered the ball entrance reaches the sorting means, it is at least that the game ball that enters the ball entrance after the game ball reaches the sorting means. While in the ball-permitted state, it is restricted by the restriction means. As a result, it is possible to prevent two or more game balls from being distributed to the first area or the second area by the distribution means in one distribution by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from being distributed to different areas in one distribution, and the game machine from malfunctioning.

The gaming machine D1 is provided with a win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and when the determination result of the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result, the restriction by the restriction means is released. A gaming machine D2 characterized by comprising a releasing means.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the satisfaction of the lottery conditions, the win/loss judgment means executes the win/fail judgment. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a predetermined result, the restriction by the restriction means is lifted by the restriction canceling means. As a result, each time the determination result by the win/loss determination means reaches a predetermined result, the sorting means can perform the sorting, so that the player can determine whether the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means and the sorting by the sorting means are performed. You can check the results separately. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming machine D3 is provided with a discharging means for discharging the game ball, which is restricted from reaching the sorting means by the restricting means, out of the game area.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is produced. That is, since the game ball whose reaching to the sorting means is restricted by the limiting means is discharged to the outside of the game area by the discharging means, the game ball whose reaching to the sorting means is restricted remains in the game area, It is possible to prevent the remaining game balls from being used as they are in the next distribution by the distribution means. As a result, when the distribution means is used for distribution, the player can launch the game ball into the entrance every time, so that the distribution means can perform the distribution at the player's preferred timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the variable means is such that the game ball entering the entrance through the distribution means is distributed to one of the first area and the second area. Based on the above, the gaming machine D4 is configured to be changed to either one of the first state and the second state.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the game balls entering the ball entrance are distributed to either one of the first area and the second area by the distribution means, the distribution means is divided into the first state and the second area by the variable means. It can be changed to one of the states. Since the timing for switching the state of the sorting means is determined, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the timing at which the sorting means is switched.

In the gaming machine D4, a variable suppressing unit that suppresses the variable unit from being changed to one of the first state and the second state in a state where the game ball has not reached the sorting unit. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being equipped.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the following effect is achieved. That is, it is suppressed by the variable suppressing means that the game ball does not reach the allocating means and is changed by the changing means to one of the first state and the second state. As a result, the distribution means is switched from the first state to the second state at a timing different from the timing at which the distribution means is varied by the variable means, causing damage to the player or damage to the gaming machine or the hall. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling distrustful.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, and D1 to D5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

<Other>
For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not a jackpot will be awarded based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening, and a lottery will be drawn separately during the jackpot to determine whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state. This prevents jackpots from being a mere task to get a lot of balls, and allows players to play games during jackpots with the expectation of transitioning to a stochastic state, improving the player's interest in playing games. There are things we are trying to achieve.

Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a plurality of routes through which the game balls can pass in a predetermined area in which the game balls can enter only when performing a random variation lottery. In this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state will occur after the jackpot is over, depending on which route the game ball is assigned to among the plurality of routes provided in the predetermined area. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-180999).
However, in such a gaming machine, even if it is possible to draw a lot whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the big hit this time, it is possible to confirm even to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the next big hit. There wasn't. As a result, each time the jackpot is won, the player may feel uncertain that he/she may be left out in the random fluctuation lottery, and even if the jackpot is won, the player's mind will not rest. There was a problem.

This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and among the plurality of routes for carrying out the lottery of the probability fluctuation state, the next probability depending on the route through which the game ball has passed. By configuring the route that the game balls can pass through during the lottery in the variable state to be changeable, a game ball to a route other than the route that transitions to the probability variation state (route that transitions to the low probability state) It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which has a configuration capable of providing a pattern in which the progress of the game is limited and which can prevent the player from feeling uneasy each time the jackpot is hit.

In addition, in such a gaming machine, when a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to shift to the probability variation state after the big hit, the game ball is routed to a route other than the route transitioning to the probability variation state (route transitioning to the low probability state) If it progressed, there was no room for reversal and it had transitioned to a low probability state. As a result, the lottery becomes dull and the player may not be able to fully enjoy the lottery.

This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and by performing a lottery in multiple stages when performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state, Even if the lottery result of 1 shows a disadvantageous result for the player, depending on the result of another lottery, it is possible to expect to win the probability variation state, and the player can fully enjoy the lottery. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can.

Furthermore, in such a gaming machine, when two or more game balls enter the predetermined area for lottery in one lottery whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state, one game ball in one lottery There is a risk that the gaming machine may malfunction due to passing through multiple routes.

This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and a predetermined area for performing a lottery when performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a probability variation state using a game ball. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent two or more game balls from entering the ball.
<Other 2>
For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not a jackpot will be awarded based on the winning of a game ball at the starting prize hole, and a lottery will be drawn separately during the jackpot to determine whether or not to shift to a probability variation This prevents jackpots from being a mere task to get a lot of balls, and allows players to play games during jackpots with the expectation of transitioning to a stochastic state, improving the player's interest in playing games. There are things we are trying to achieve.
Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a plurality of routes through which the game balls can pass in a predetermined area in which the game balls can enter only when performing a random variation lottery. In this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not a probability variation state will occur after the jackpot is over, depending on which route the game ball is assigned to among a plurality of routes provided in a predetermined area (for example, Patent Document 1). 1: JP-A-2003-180999).
However, in such a gaming machine, if two or more game balls enter the predetermined area for the lottery in one lottery whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state, the game ball is one lottery. There is a risk that the gaming machine may malfunction due to passing through multiple routes.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and a predetermined area for performing a lottery when performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a probability variation state using a game ball. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent two or more game balls from entering the ball.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of the technical idea 1 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a first area and a second area into which a game ball entering the ball entrance can enter. And a distribution means for allocating the game ball entering the ball entrance to one of the first area and the second area, and the game ball entering the ball entrance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Based on the switching means for switching to a ball entry permission state for permitting that for a predetermined period and the game ball entering the first area, the player is more likely than when the game ball entering the second area. It is provided with a transition means for shifting to an advantageous special game state, and the distribution means has a first state in which a game ball can be distributed to the first area and a game to a second area. The ball is provided with a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which the ball is easily distributed, and when one game ball entering the ball entrance reaches the distribution means, the game ball is moved to the front after the game ball. There is provided limiting means for limiting the arrival of the game ball, which has entered the entry ball opening, to the sorting means at least while in the entry permitted state.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and is provided with a win/loss determination means for performing a win/fail determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the determination result of the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result. If there is, a restriction releasing means for releasing the restriction by the limiting means is provided.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, and has a discharging means for discharging the game ball, which is restricted from reaching the sorting means by the limiting means, out of the game area. Prepare
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the variable means is a gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance by the sorting means. And, based on the fact that it is distributed to either one of the second region, it is changed to one of the first state and the second state.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, which one of the first state and the second state is set by the variable means in a state where the game ball has not reached the sorting means. A variable suppressing unit that suppresses the change to one side is provided.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are distributed to one of the first area and the second area by the distribution means, and the game balls enter based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The switching means permits the game ball to enter the mouth for a predetermined period. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first area, the transition means shifts the game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball entered the second area. .. Further, the changing means changes the distribution means between a first state in which the game balls can be distributed to the first area and a second state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second area. Here, when one game ball that has entered the ball entrance reaches the sorting means, it is at least that the game ball that enters the ball entrance after the game ball reaches the sorting means. While in the ball-permitted state, it is restricted by the restriction means. As a result, it is possible to prevent two or more game balls from being distributed to the first area or the second area by the distribution means in one distribution by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from being distributed to different areas in one distribution, and the game machine from malfunctioning.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the satisfaction of the lottery conditions, the win/loss judgment means executes the win/fail judgment. Then, when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a predetermined result, the restriction by the restriction means is lifted by the restriction canceling means. As a result, each time the determination result by the win/loss determination means reaches a predetermined result, the sorting means can perform the sorting, so that the player can determine whether the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means and the sorting by the sorting means are performed. You can check the results separately. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, since the game ball whose reaching to the sorting means is restricted by the limiting means is discharged to the outside of the game area by the discharging means, the game ball whose reaching to the sorting means is restricted remains in the game area, It is possible to prevent the remaining game balls from being used as they are in the next distribution by the distribution means. As a result, when the distribution means is used for distribution, the player can launch the game ball into the entrance every time, so that the distribution means can perform the distribution at the player's preferred timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game balls entering the ball entrance are distributed to either one of the first area and the second area by the distribution means, the distribution means is divided into the first state and the second area by the variable means. It can be changed to one of the states. Since the timing for switching the state of the sorting means is determined, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the timing at which the sorting means is switched.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is suppressed by the variable suppressing means that the game ball does not reach the allocating means and is changed to either one of the first state and the second state by the changing means. As a result, the distribution means is switched from the first state to the second state at a timing different from the timing at which the distribution means is varied by the variable means, causing damage to the player or damage to the gaming machine or the hall. It is possible to suppress a feeling of distrust.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
64 1st entrance (judgment means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
300 Lottery device ( control specification means, distribution means)
310 Gate for lottery (ball entry means)
403a Ball stopper (first state setting means)
405a Ball stopper (second state setting means)
501 hour shortened entrance (second area)
502 to 504 Positive change entrance (first area)
S1612, S1615, S1621 privilege game execution means S2703, S2704, S2713 notification means, informing decision means S4203 display control means, the effect control means

Claims (2)

A discriminating means for discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition;
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination of the determining means being a specific determination result,
Display means for displaying a performance mode,
Production control means for displaying a predetermined production mode on the display means,
As a control after the execution is completed of the benefits game by the award game execution means, the first control, the second control is advantageous to the player than the first control, at least including a plurality of first control In a gaming machine having a control specifying means for specifying
A first state in which the control specifying unit can specify the first control when the determination result of the determining unit is the specific determination result is set based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition; 1 state setting means,
Before SL than the first state, easily identified in succession the second control over the award game several times by the control identification means when the determination result becomes the specific discrimination result of the discriminating means Second state setting means for setting the second state
An informing means for performing a specific informing according to the determination result of the determining means,
At least when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result in the first state, the specific notification performed by the notification means is the first notification and the specific notification rather than the first notification. A second notification indicating that the second control is easily specified by the control specifying means in the privilege game executed after the notification is finished, and a notification determining means configured to be able to determine at least ,
At least as a presentation mode in the execution period of the privilege game executed in the first state, when the next privilege game after the privilege game is finished is the first situation that is easily executed in the first state In the case of the second situation in which the first effect mode can be determined and the next bonus game is easier to be executed in the second state than the first condition, the second effect mode different from the first effect mode gaming machine which is characterized in that what is configured to be easier to determine than the representation embodiment the first situation. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is playable using a predetermined game medium.
Amusement machine.

Images